X792dtse - Printer LEXMARK - Free user manual and instructions
Find the device manual for free X792dtse LEXMARK in PDF.
User questions about X792dtse LEXMARK
0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.
Ask a new question about this device
Download the instructions for your Printer in PDF format for free! Find your manual X792dtse - LEXMARK and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. X792dtse by LEXMARK.
USER MANUAL X792dtse LEXMARK
September 2011 www.lexmark.com
Machine type(s):
7562, 4917
Model(s):
432, 436, dn1, dn2, gd1, gd2, dt1, dt2, gt1, gt2, df1, df2, gf1, gf2, d01, d02, g01, g02, t01, t02, g91, g92, f01, f02, g81, g82
Contents
Safety information....16
Learning about the printer....18
Thank you for choosing this printer!....18
Finding information about the printer....18
Selecting a location for the printer....19
Printer configurations....20
Basic functions of the scanner....21
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass....22
Understanding the printer control panel....23
Understanding the home screen....24
Understanding the home screen....24
Using the touch-screen buttons....25
Setting up and using the home screen applications....29
Accessing the Embedded Web Server....29
Activating the home screen applications....29
Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server....32
Additional printer setup....33
Installing internal options....33
Available internal options....33
Using the security lock feature .... 34
Accessing the system board....35
Installing a memory card ....38
Installing a flash memory or firmware card....40
Installing an Internal Solutions Port....42
Installing a printer hard disk 46
Removing a printer hard disk....51
Order of installation....52
Installing optional trays....53
Attaching cables....54
Verifying printer setup....55
Printing a menu settings page ....55
Printing a network setup page....56
Setting up the printer software....56
Installing the printer software....56
Updating available options in the printer driver ....57
Setting up wireless printing....57
Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network....57
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)....58
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)....60
Installing the printer on a wired network....62
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port....65
Setting up serial printing....66
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact....68
Saving paper and toner....68
Using recycled paper 68
Conserving supplies 68
Saving energy....69
Using Eco-Mode....69
Reducing printer noise....69
Adjusting Sleep Mode....70
Using Hibernate Mode....71
Adjusting the brightness of the display 71
Setting the standard exit bin light....72
Recycling....72
Recycling Lexmark products 72
Recycling Lexmark packaging....73
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling....73
Loading paper and specialty media....74
Setting the paper size and type....74
Configuring Universal paper settings....74
Loading the standard or optional 550-sheet tray....75
Loading the 2000-sheet high-capacity feeder....78
Loading the multipurpose feeder....80
Linking and unlinking trays....82
Linking trays 82
Unlinking trays 83
Linking exit bins 83
Creating a custom name for a paper type 83
Assigning a custom paper type name 84
Configuring a custom name 84
Paper and specialty media guidelines....85
Paper guidelines....85
Paper characteristics....85
Selecting paper 86
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead 86
Using recycled paper and other office papers....86
Storing paper 88
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights....88
Supported paper sizes 88
Supported paper types and weights....90
Supported finishing features 90
Printing....93
Printing a document....93
Printing a document 93
Printing in black and white 93
Adjusting toner darkness 93
Printing from a flash drive....94
Printing from a flash drive 94
Supported flash drives and file types....96
Printing on specialty media....96
Tips on using letterhead 96
Tips on using transparencies 97
Tips on using envelopes....97
Tips on using labels 97
Tips on using card stock....98
Printing confidential and other held jobs....98
Storing print jobs in the printer 98
Printing confidential and other held jobs 99
Printing information pages....100
Printing a font sample list....100
Printing a directory list....100
Canceling a print job....100
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel....100
Canceling a print job from the computer 100
Copying....102
Making copies....102
Making a quick copy ....102
Copying using the ADF....102
Copying using the scanner glass 103
Copying film photos....103
Copying on specialty media....103
Copying on transparencies 103
Copying on letterhead 103
Customizing copy settings....104
Copying in black and white....104
Copying to a different size ....104
Making copies using paper from a selected tray 104
Copying different paper sizes ....105
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)....105
Reducing or enlarging copies....106
Adjusting copy quality 106
Collating copies....107
Placing separator sheets between copies....107
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet 108
Creating a custom copy job (job build)....108
Placing information on copies....109
Placing the date and time at the top of each page....109
Placing an overlay message on each page....109
Canceling a copy job....109
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF....109
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass 110
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed....110
Understanding the copy screens and options....110
Copy from 110
Copy to....110
Copies 110
Scale 111
Darkness 111
Sides (Duplex) 111
Collate 111
Content 111
Color 112
Advanced Options....112
Save As Shortcut....113
E-mailing....114
Getting ready to e-mail....114
Setting up the e-mail function....114
Configuring e-mail settings....114
Creating an e-mail shortcut....115
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server....115
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen....115
E-mailing a document....116
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen 116
Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number 116
Sending an e-mail using the address book 116
Customizing e-mail settings....117
Adding e-mail subject and message information 117
Changing the output file type 117
Canceling an e-mail....118
Understanding e-mail options....118
Recipients 118
Subject 118
Message....118
File Name 118
Original Size 118
Resolution....119
Color 119
Content 119
Darkness 119
Send As 119
Page Setup 120
Scan Preview....120
Advanced Options....120
Faxing....121
Getting the printer ready to fax....121
Initial fax setup 122
Choosing a fax connection....123
Connecting to an analog telephone line 123
Connecting to a DSL service....124
Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system 124
Connecting to a distinctive ring service 125
Connecting to an adapter for your country or region 125
Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number 126
Setting the date and time 126
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time....127
Creating shortcuts....127
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 127
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen 128
Sending a fax....128
Sending a fax using the touch screen 128
Sending a fax using the computer 128
Sending a fax using shortcuts 129
Sending a fax using the address book....129
Customizing fax settings....130
Changing the fax resolution....130
Making a fax lighter or darker 130
Sending a fax at a scheduled time 130
Viewing a fax log....131
Blocking junk faxes....131
Canceling an outgoing fax....131
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning....131
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory....132
Understanding fax options....132
Content 132
Resolution....132
Darkness 133
Color 133
Page Setup 133
Scan Preview....133
Delayed Send 133
Advanced Options....133
Holding and forwarding faxes....134
Holding faxes 134
Forwarding a fax 134
Scanning to an FTP address....136
Scanning to an FTP address....136
Scanning to an FTP address using the touch screen 136
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number 136
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book 137
Creating shortcuts....137
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server....137
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen 138
Understanding FTP options....138
FTP 138
File Name 138
Original Size 138
Send As 138
Color 139
Resolution....139
Darkness 139
Page Setup 139
Content 139
Scan Preview....140
Advanced Options....140
Scanning to a computer or flash drive....141
Scanning to a computer....141
Scanning to a flash drive....142
Understanding the Scan Center features....142
Using the ScanBack Utility....142
Understanding scan profile options....143
Original Size 143
Resolution....143
Color 143
Content 143
Darkness 144
Page Setup 144
Scan Preview....144
Advanced Options....144
Understanding printer menus....145
Menus list....145
Supplies menu....146
Paper menu....148
Default Source menu 148
Paper Size/Type menu....148
Configure MP menu....151
Substitute Size menu 152
Paper Texture menu 152
Paper Weight menu....154
Paper Loading menu 155
Custom Types menu 157
Custom Names menu 157
Custom Bin Names menu 158
Custom Scan Sizes menu 158
Universal Setup menu....158
Bin Setup menu....159
Reports menu....160
Reports menu 160
Network/Ports menu....161
Active NIC menu 161
Standard Network or Network [x] menus....161
Network Reports menu 163
Network Card menu....163
TCP/IP menu 164
IPv6 menu....165
Wireless menu 166
AppleTalk menu....166
Standard USB menu....167
Parallel [x] menu....169
Serial [x] menu....171
SMTP Setup menu 173
Security menu....174
Editing Security Setups menu ....174
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu 175
Confidential Print menu....176
Disk Wiping menu....176
Security Audit Log menu....177
Set Date and Time menu 178
Settings menu....179
General Settings menu 179
Copy Settings menu 188
Fax Settings menu....194
E-mail Settings menu 205
FTP Settings menu 211
Flash Drive menu 215
Print Settings....221
Help menu....235
Securing the memory before moving the printer....237
Statement of Volatility....237
Erasing volatile memory....237
Erasing non-volatile memory....238
Erasing printer hard disk memory....238
Configuring printer hard disk encryption....239
Maintaining the printer....240
Cleaning the exterior of the printer....240
Cleaning the scanner glass....241
Cleaning the ADF parts....242
Cleaning the printhead lenses....244
Storing supplies....245
Checking the status of supplies....245
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel 245
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer....245
Ordering supplies....246
Ordering a print cartridge....246
Ordering a fuser or a transfer module....246
Ordering a waste toner bottle 247
Ordering staple cartridges 247
Ordering an ADF kit....247
Ordering a cleaning kit....247
Replacing supplies....248
Replacing a print cartridge....248
Replacing the waste toner bottle 251
Moving the printer....252
Before moving the printer 252
Moving the printer to another location....253
Shipping the printer 253
Administrative support....254
Finding advanced networking and administrator information....254
Using the Embedded Web Server....254
Checking the virtual display....254
Checking the status of the printer....254
Setting up e-mail alerts....255
Viewing reports....255
Restoring factory default settings....256
Clearing jams....257
Avoiding jams....257
Understanding jam numbers and locations....257
200 paper jam....259
201 paper jam....259
202–203 paper jams....260
230 paper jam....261
231–239 paper jams....262
24x paper jam....262
250 paper jam....263
280-289 paper jams....264
290–292 paper jams....265
400–403 and 460–461 paper jams....265
431-438 paper jams....266
455 staple jam....266
Troubleshooting....269
Solving basic printer problems....269
Understanding printer messages....269
Adjusting color 269
An error has occurred with the USB drive. Please remove and reinsert drive....269
Change [paper source] to [custom type name]....269
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]....270
Change [paper source] to [custom string] 270
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]....270
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type]....270
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type] load [orientation]....270
Close paper transport cover 270
Close [tray] door 271
Close finisher top cover 271
Close front door....271
Close top access cover 271
Disk corrupted 271
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space....271
Disk problem....271
Empty the hole punch box....272
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB....272
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator....272
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator....272
Fax Station Name not set up....272
Fax Station Number not set up....272
Install bin [x] 273
Install Tray [x] 273
Insert the hole punch box....273
Insert Tray [x]....273
Insert staple cartridge....273
Install envelope feeder 273
Load [src] with [custom type name]....274
Load [src] with [custom string] 274
Load [src] with [size]....274
Load [src] with [type] [size]....274
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]....275
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]....275
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] 275
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size]....275
Load staples 275
Memory full, cannot print faxes 275
Reattach bin [x]....276
Reattach bin [x] - [y]....276
Remove packaging material, [area name] 277
Remove paper from standard output bin....277
Remove paper from bin [x]....277
Remove paper from all bins....277
Remove paper from [linked set bin name] 277
Restore held jobs? 277
Scanner automatic feeder cover open 277
Slide finisher to the left 277
Some held jobs were not restored 277
Supply needed to complete job 277
Tray [x] paper size unsupported 278
Unsupported disk....278
31.xx Missing or defective [color] cartridge 278
32.xx [color] cartridge part number unsupported by device....278
34 Incorrect paper size, open [src] 278
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 278
37 Insufficient memory to collate job....279
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 279
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted....279
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored 279
38 Memory full 279
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed 279
40 [color] invalid refill, change cartridge 279
51 Defective flash detected 280
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources....280
53 Unformatted flash detected 280
54 Network [x] software error....280
54 Serial option [x] error....280
54 Standard network software error 280
55 Unsupported option in slot [x]....281
56 Parallel port [x] disabled 281
56 Serial port [x] disabled 281
56 Standard USB port disabled 281
56 Standard parallel port disabled....281
56 USB port [x] disabled 281
57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored 282
58 Too many bins attached....282
58 Too many disks installed 282
58 Too many flash options installed 282
58 Too many trays attached 282
58 Input config error....283
59 Incompatible output bin [x] 283
61 Remove defective disk....283
62 Disk full 283
80.xx Fuser near life warning....283
80.xx Fuser life warning 283
80.xx Replace fuser 284
80.xx Fuser missing 284
82.xx Replace waste toner bottle 284
82.xx Waste toner bottle missing 284
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full 284
83.xx Replace transfer module 284
83.xx Transfer module life warning 284
83.xx Transfer module missing 284
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low 284
88.xx [color] cartridge low....285
88.xx [Color] cartridge very low....285
88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low 285
840.01 Scanner disabled by admin 285
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. 285
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option 286
Solving printing problems....286
Multiple-language PDF files do not print....286
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds 286
Error message about reading USB drive appears 286
Print jobs do not print....286
Confidential and other held jobs do not print 287
Print job takes longer than expected....288
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper 288
Incorrect characters print 288
Tray linking does not work....288
Large jobs do not collate....289
Unexpected page breaks occur....289
Solving copy problems....289
Copier does not respond 289
Scanner unit does not close....290
Poor copy quality 290
Partial document or photo copies 291
Solving scanner problems....292
Checking an unresponsive scanner....292
Scan was not successful....292
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 292
Poor scanned image quality....293
Partial document or photo scans....293
Cannot scan from a computer 294
Solving fax problems....294
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up 294
Caller ID is not shown 294
Cannot send or receive a fax 295
Can send but not receive faxes....296
Can receive but not send faxes....297
Received fax has poor print quality 297
Solving home screen applications problems....298
An application error has occurred 298
Solving option problems....299
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed 299
Paper tray problems 299
2,000-sheet drawer problems 300
Cannot detect flash memory card 300
Cannot detect printer hard disk....300
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly 300
Internal print server does not operate correctly 301
Memory card 301
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly 301
Solving paper feed problems....302
Paper frequently jams....302
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared 302
Jammed pages are not reprinted....302
Solving print quality problems....303
Characters have jagged or uneven edges 303
Clipped images....303
Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages 303
Shadow images appear on prints 304
Gray background on prints 304
Incorrect margins....305
Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 305
Paper curl....306
Print irregularities....306
Print is too dark 307
Print is too light....308
Printer is printing blank pages 309
Repeating defects appear on prints....309
Skewed print....310
Solid color or black pages appear on prints....310
Black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper 311
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints....311
Streaked vertical lines....312
Toner fog or background shading appears on a page....312
Toner rubs off 313
Toner specks 314
Transparency print quality is poor....314
Uneven print density 314
Solving color quality problems....315
FAQ about color printing 315
Embedded Web Server does not open....318
Check the network connection....318
Check the address entered in the Web browser 318
Temporarily disable Web proxy servers 318
Contacting customer support....318
Notices....319
Product information....319
Edition notice....319
Power consumption....324
Index....338
Safety information
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions. You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:
- Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
- Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
- Lift the printer off the optional drawer, and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce risk of fire, use only the telecommunications (RJ-11) cord provided with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Learning about the printer
Thank you for choosing this printer!
We've worked hard to make sure it will meet your needs.
To start using your new printer right away, use the setup materials that came with the printer, and then skim the User's Guide to learn how to perform basic tasks. To get the most out of your printer, read the User's Guide carefully, and make sure you check the latest updates on our Web site.
We're committed to delivering performance and value with our printers, and we want to make sure you're satisfied. If you do encounter any problems along the way, one of our knowledgeable support representatives will be delighted to help you get back on track fast. And if you find something we could do better, please let us know. After all, you are the reason we do what we do, and your suggestions help us do it better.
Finding information about the printer
| What are you looking for? Find it here | |
| Initial setup instructions:•Connecting the printer•Installing the printer software | Setup documentation—The setup documentation came with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com. |
| Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:•Selecting and storing paper and specialty media•Loading paper•Configuring printer settings•Viewing and printing documents and photos•Setting up and using the printer software•Configuring the printer on a network (depending on your printer model)•Caring for and maintaining the printer•Troubleshooting and solving problems | User's Guide—The User's Guide is available on the Software and Documentation CD.For updates, check our Web site at http://support.lexmark.com. |
| Instructions for:•Installing the printer using Guided or Advanced wireless setup•Connecting the printer to an Ethernet or a wireless network•Troubleshooting printer connection problems | Networking Guide— Open the Software and Documentation CD, and then look for Printer and Software Documentation under the Pubs folder. From the list of publications, click the Networking Guide link. |
| Help using the printer software | Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program or application, and then click Help.Click ? to view context-sensitive information.Notes:The Help installs automatically with the printer software.The printer software is located in the printer Program folder or on the desktop, depending on your operating system. |
| Latest supplemental information, updates, and technical support:DocumentationDriver downloadsLive chat supportE-mail supportTelephone support | Lexmark Support Web site—http://support.lexmark.comNote: Select your country or region, and then select your product to view the appropriate support site.Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for your country or region can be found on the Support Web site or on the printed warranty that came with your printer.Record the following information (located on the store receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready when you contact support so they may serve you faster:Machine Type numberSerial numberDate purchasedStore where purchased |
| Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:In the US—See the Statement of Limited Warranty included with this printer, or athttp://support.lexmark.com.In other countries and regions—See the printed warranty that came with your printer. | |
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any options, leave enough room for them, too. It is important to:
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee 156 standard.
- Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
- Keep the printer:
—Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators
—Free from direct sunlight, humidity extremes, or temperature fluctuations
—Clean, dry, and free of dust
- Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
text_image
1 2 3 4 5| 1 458 mm (18 in.) |
| 2 100 mm (3.9 in.) |
| 3 380 mm (14.9 in.) |
| 4 432 mm (17 in.) |
| 5 150 mm (5.9 in.) |
Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
You can configure your basic printer by adding optional trays.
text_image
Technical diagram of a multi-tiered printer with numbered parts labeled for identification.| 1 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) | |
| 2 ADF input tray | |
| 3 Printer control panel | |
| 4 Standard exit bin | |
| 5 Front door | |
| 6 Standard 550-sheet trays (Tray 1) | |
| 7 Multipurpose feeder | |
| 8 Side door | |
| 9 Jam access doors | |
| 10 | Optional 2,000-sheet high-capacity feeder |
| 11 Optional 550-sheet trays | |
| 12 Caster base | |
Basic functions of the scanner
The scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for large workgroups. You can:
- Make quick copies, or change the settings on the printer control panel to perform specific copy jobs.
- Send a fax using the printer control panel.
- Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
- Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a flash drive, or an FTP destination.
- Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF by way of FTP).
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
text_image
Diagram showing a printer with a document being inserted, accompanied by a person silhouette icon and a red arrow indicating the process.Use the ADF for multiple pages, including duplex pages.
text_image
Diagram illustrating a person's identity verification process with labeled arrows and a gender symbol on the scanner.Use the scanner glass for single pages or book pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings or lightweight carbonless forms).
Using the ADF
- Load the document into the ADF faceup, short edge first.
- Load up to 75 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray.
- Scan sizes from 76 x 139 mm (3.0 x 5.5 in.) to 215 x 355 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
- Scan documents with mixed page sizes (letter and legal).
- Scan media weights from 52 to 120g / m^2 (14 to 32 lb).
- Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
- Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
- Scan or copy documents up to 215 x 355 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
•Copy books up to 25 mm (1 in.) thick.
Understanding the printer control panel
text_image
Diagram of a computer monitor with numbered parts for identification and function| Item Description | ||
| 1 | Display | Lets you view scanning, copying, faxing, and printing options as well as status and error messages |
| 2 Indicator light | •Off—The power is off.•Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.•Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.•Blinking red—Operator intervention is needed. | |
| 3 Sleep Activates Sleep Mode or Hibernate ModeThe following are the statuses of the indicator light and the Sleep button:• Entering or waking from Sleep Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep button is unilluminated.• Operating in Sleep Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep button is illuminated solid amber.• Entering or waking from Hibernate Mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep button is illuminated blinking amber.• Operating in Hibernate Mode—The indicator light is unilluminated, Sleep button is blinking amber in pulsing pattern. | ||
| 4 Keypad Lets you enter numbers, letters, or symbols on the display | ||
| 5 Submit Lets you submit changes made in the printer settings | ||
| 6 Stop/Cancel Stops all printer activityNote: A list of option is displayed once Stopped appears on the display. | ||
| 7 Home Lets you navigate back to the home screen | ||
| 8 Card reader Limits the use of certain printer functions to authenticated usersNote: The card reader may not be available on all printer models. | ||
| 9 USB port Lets you insert a USB flash drive to send data or to save scanned images | ||
Understanding the home screen
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to messages.
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
text_image
Copy E-mail Bookmarks Fax Search Held Jobs Change Language Copy Shortcuts FTP USB Page 1 of 3 Status/ Supplies Ready.| Touch To | |
| Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies. | |
| E-mail Access the E-mail menus and send e-mails. | |
| Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax. | |
 | Access the printer menus.Note: These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state. |
| FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server. | |
| Status message bar | Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.Show printer conditions such as Toner Low or Cartridge Low.Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing. |
| Status/Supplies | Display a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing.Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it. |
| USB or USB Thumbdrive | View, select, print, scan, or e-mail photos and documents from a flash drive.Note: This button appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or flash drive is connected to the printer. |
| Bookmarks Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any other application. | |
| Held Jobs Display all current held jobs. | |
Other buttons that may appear on the home screen:
| Touch To | |
| Search held jobs Search on any of the following items:User name for held or confidential print jobsJob names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobsProfile namesBookmark container or print job namesUSB container or print job names for supported file types | |
| Release Held Fax Access the list of held faxes. | Note: This button appears only when there are held faxes with a scheduled hold time previously set. |
| Lock Device Open a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to lock the printer control panel.Note: This button appears only when the printer is unlocked and password has been set. | |
| Unlock Device Open a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to unlock the printer control panel.Note: This button appears only when the printer is locked. The printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while this appears. | |
| Cancel Jobs Open the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three headings: Print, Fax, and Network.The following options are available under the Print, Fax, and Network headings:Print jobCopy jobFax profileFTP•E-mail sendEach heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can show only three jobs per screen. If more than three jobs exist in a column, then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs. | |
| Change Language | Launch the Change Language pop-up window that allows you to change the primary language of the printer. |
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings and administrative setup.
Sample touch screen
text_image
Copy from Letter (8.5 x 11 in) Copy to Letter (8.5 x 11 in) Plain Paper Sides (Duplex) Collate -1 2 -1 2 1 to 2 Sided On Scale Auto 100% + Content Text/Photo Staple Punch 3 Stiples, Left On Darkness Color Save as Shortcut (Other Features) On (Setting) ? Log Out — Copies: 999 + Options Submit| Touch To | |
| Submit Submit | changes made in the printer settings. |
| Sample Copy Print a sample copy. | |
Right arrow | Scroll to the right. |
Left arrow | Scroll to the left. |
Home | Return to the home screen. |
Right increase | Select a higher value. |
Left decrease | Select a lower value. |
Exit | Exit from the current screen. |
Tips | Open a context-sensitive Help dialog on the touch screen. |
Other touch-screen buttons
| Touch To | ||
| Accept |  | Save a setting. |
| Cancel |  | •Cancel an action or a selection.•Exit a screen and lets you return to the previous screen without saving changes. |
| Reset |  | Reset values on the screen. |
| Radio button |  | Select or clear an item. |
Features
| Feature Description | |
| Menu trail line: Menus > Settings > Copy Settings > Number of Copies | A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the path taken to arrive at the current menu.Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen. If you touch an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default setting. |
Attendance message alert | If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks. |
Warning | If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears. |
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:
- Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only on select printer models.
- There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. To learn more, visit www.lexmark.com. Or, inquire at your point of purchase.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.
1 Obtain the printer IP address:
•From the printer control panel home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
- By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
The Embedded Web Server page appears.
Showing or hiding icons on the home screen
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
A list of basic printer functions appears.
2 Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen.
Cleared check box items are hidden.
3 Click Submit.
Activating the home screen applications
For detailed information about configuring and using home screen applications, visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Forms and Favorites
Icon Description
The application helps you simplify and streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the home screen. For example, you can print the latest version of a form exactly when you need it. This eliminates inventories of printed forms that can easily become outdated.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.
To configure Forms and Favorites, do the following:
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Forms and Favorites.
2 Define the bookmarks, and then customize the settings.
3 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the home screen, and then navigate through form categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Scan to Network
Icon Description
The application lets you capture a digital image of a hard-copy document and route it to a shared network folder. Immediately upon delivery, the file is available to anyone permitted to access the folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations.
Notes:
- The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.
- The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
To configure Scan to Network, do the following:
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Scan to Network.
2 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
3 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the home screen, and then follow the printer display prompts.
My MFP
Icon Description
natural_image
Gray gear icon with metallic teeth and central bore (no text or symbols)The application lets you customize your touch-screen settings and store those preferences on a flash drive. Each time you want to copy, fax, or scan, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer. All your personal preferences are automatically uploaded, including job settings, home screen preferences, and address book.
Note: The icon appears only when a flash drive with My MFP settings is inserted into the USB port of the printer.
To activate My MFP, insert a flash drive into the USB port of the printer, and then follow the instructions on the printer home screen display to run the setup wizard.
To use My MFP, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer whenever you want to copy, fax, or scan.
WS-Scan
Icon Description
The Web Services-Scan application lets you scan documents at the printer, and then send the scanned image to your computer. WS-Scan is a Microsoft application that is similar to Scan to Network, but has the capability of sending the scanned document to a Windows-based application. To learn more about WS-Scan, refer to the Microsoft documentation.
Note: The icon appears on the printer home screen only when there is a Windows 7 or Windows Vista client currently registered with the printer.
Remote Operator Panel
This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control panel, even when you are not physically near the printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing at the printer.
To activate Remote Operator Panel, do the following:
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Remote Operator Panel.
2 Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
3 Click Apply.
To use Remote Operator Panel, from the Embedded Web Server, click Applications > Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.
Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server
You can export configuration settings into a text file that can then be imported and used to apply the settings to one or more additional printers.
Exporting a configuration
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings or Configuration.
2 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
3 From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
4 Click Configure > Export.
5 Follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file, and then enter a unique file name or use the default name.
Note: If a JVM Out of Memory error occurs, then repeat the export until the configuration file is saved.
Importing a configuration
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings or Configuration.
2 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
3 From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
4 Click Configure > Import.
5 Browse to the saved configuration file, and then load or preview it.
Note: If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the browser, and then click Apply.
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
You can customize your printer connectivity and memory capacity by adding optional cards. The instructions in this section explain how to install the available cards; you can also use them to locate a card for removal.
Available internal options
- Memory cards
-Printer memory
-Flash memory
-Fonts
- Firmware cards
- Bar Code
-PrintCryption ^TM
•Lexmark ^TM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
- RS-232-C Serial ISP
- Parallel 1284-B ISP
-MarkNet ^TM N8250 802.11 b/g/n Wireless ISP
—MarkNet N8130 10/100 Fiber ISP
—MarkNet N8120 10/100/1000 Ethernet ISP
Using the security lock feature
The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is attached, the printer is locked. Once locked, the metal plate and the system board cannot be removed. Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown.
natural_image
Diagram of a printer with a red arrow pointing to a vertical panel, showing internal components (no text or symbols)Accessing the system board
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
1 Open the cover.
2 Remove the metal panel.
a Turn the screws on the panel counterclockwise to remove them.
natural_image
Diagram of an open computer with internal components and red circular arrows indicating motion or flow (no text or symbols present)b Shift the metal panel to the left to disengage the hooks, then pull forward to remove it.
natural_image
3D diagram of an open computer with a green internal circuit board and red arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols present)3 Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connectors.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
text_image
Labeled diagram of an internal computer motherboard showing components 1 to 4 with visible circuitry and connectors.| 1 Memory card connector |
| 2 Firmware and flash memory card connectors |
| 3 Internal print server connector |
| 4 Hard disk connector |
4 Reattach the system board cover.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
a Reinstall the hooks on the left side of the metal panel into the slots on the system board cage, and then shift to the right.
natural_image
3D diagram of an open computer with a green internal circuit board and red arrow indicating compression (no text or symbols)b Align and then turn each screw clockwise to tighten.
natural_image
Diagram of an open computer with ventilation slots and red circular arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols present)c Close the cover.
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see "Accessing the system board" on page 35.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2 Unpack the memory card.
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3 On the system board, open the memory card connector latches.
natural_image
3D diagram of a vertical mechanical component with red directional arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)4 Align the notches on the memory card to the ridges on the connector.
natural_image
3D diagram of a mechanical component with labeled parts (1 and 2), showing green PCB and cylindrical structure (no text or symbols beyond labels)| 1 Notch |
| 2 Ridge |
5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place.
natural_image
Diagram of a mechanical assembly with red arrows indicating force or direction, showing components aligned along a vertical structure (no text or symbols present)6 Reattach the system board cover.
Installing a flash memory or firmware card
The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card. Only one of each may be installed, but the connectors are interchangeable.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2 Unpack the card.
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board.
natural_image
3D mechanical component diagram showing a green base with yellow internal components and labeled parts 1 and 2 (no text or symbols beyond labels)| 1 Plastic pins |
| 2 Metal pins |
4 Push the card firmly into place.
natural_image
3D diagram of a mechanical assembly with red arrows indicating direction, no visible text or symbolsNotes:
- The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board. - Be careful not to damage the connectors.
5 Reattach the system board cover.
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board. For more information, see "Accessing the system board" on page 35.
2 Unpack the ISP and plastic tee.
Note: Avoid touching the components on the card.
3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.
natural_image
Diagram showing a computer monitor with an open circuit board and a red arrow indicating a location or change, no text or symbols present.4 Remove the printer hard disk.
For more information, see "Removing a printer hard disk" on page 51.
5 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.
text_image
Diagram showing a computer motherboard with labeled parts and a magnified view highlighting component 1 with red arrows.6 Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes on the system board, and press down until the tee clicks into place. Be sure each post of the tee has latched completely, and the tee is seated firmly on the system board.
natural_image
3D diagram of a computer motherboard with visible components and wiring (no text or symbols)7 Install the ISP on the plastic tee. Angle the ISP over the plastic tee, and then slant it toward the plastic tee so that any overhanging connectors will pass through the ISP opening in the system board cage.
natural_image
Diagram of a computer motherboard showing a green circuit board and a red directional arrow (no text or symbols)8 Lower the ISP toward the plastic tee until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic tee.
natural_image
Close-up of a computer motherboard showing a green circuit board and cable, with a red arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)9 Insert the long thumbscrew and turn it clockwise, enough to hold the ISP in place, but do not yet tighten the thumbscrew.
natural_image
Diagram of a computer monitor with green circuit board and red directional arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)10 Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the system board cage.
natural_image
Diagram of a computer motherboard showing a green circuit board and a close-up view of the internal components (no text or symbols present)11 Tighten the long thumbscrew.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not overtighten the thumbscrew.
12 Insert the plug of the ISP interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color-coded.
natural_image
3D diagram of a mechanical assembly with a curved component and a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)13 Reattach the system board cover.
Installing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see "Accessing the system board" on page 35.
2 Unpack the printer hard disk.
3 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.
natural_image
Diagram of a computer monitor with an open circuit board and a red arrow indicating a location or change (no text or symbols present)Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:
a Using a flathead screwdriver, loosen the screws.
natural_image
Diagram of a computer motherboard showing internal components and a magnified view of the next component (no text or symbols present)b Remove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket, and then remove the bracket.
c Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP, and then press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place.
natural_image
Diagram of a computer monitor with circuit board and cable connections, showing a red arrow indicating a directional change (no text or symbols present)d Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color-coded.
natural_image
3D diagram of a mechanical assembly with blue components and a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)To install a printer hard disk directly on the system board:
a Align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to the holes in the system board, and then press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place.
natural_image
3D diagram of a computer motherboard with visible components and a red arrow indicating a directional change (no text or symbols)b Use the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket.
natural_image
Diagram of a computer motherboard with a close-up view showing internal components and a magnified inset highlighting a specific part (no text or symbols present)c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color-coded.
natural_image
3D diagram of a mechanical assembly with a curved component and directional arrows, set against a green background (no text or symbols)4 Reattach the system board cover.
Removing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see "Accessing the system board" on page 35.
2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board, leaving the cable attached to the printer hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling the cable out.
natural_image
3D diagram of a mechanical assembly with blue blocks and a gray curved component, no text or symbols present3 Remove the screws while holding the printer hard disk in place, and then remove the printer hard disk.
text_image
Diagram showing a computer motherboard with labeled parts and a magnified view highlighting component 1 and component 2.4 Set the printer hard disk aside.
5 Reattach the system board cover.
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Install the printer and any options you have purchased in the following order:
•Caster base
- Optional spacer
- Optional 550-sheet trays or 2,000-sheet high-capacity feeder
• Standard 550-sheet trays
•Printer
For information on installing a caster base, a 550- or 2,000-sheet optional tray, spacer, or any of the finishers, see the setup documentation that came with the option.
Installing optional trays
The printer supports the following optional input sources:
- 550-sheet tray
• 2,000-sheet high-capacity feeder
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1 Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.
2 Place the tray near the printer.
3 Turn the printer off.
4 Align the printer with the tray, and then lower the printer into place.
Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked. When necessary, remove stacked trays one at a time from the top down.
text_image
Technical diagram of a multi-layered printer with labeled parts 1 and 2| 1 Standard 550-sheet tray (Tray 1) |
| 2 Optional 550-sheet trays |
5 Turn the printer back on.
6 Set the printer software to recognize the optional input source.
For more information, see "Updating available options in the printer driver" on page 57.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable.
Be sure to match the following:
•The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
•The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
text_image
Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with labeled components and magnified view of cable connections| 1 USB portWarning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown while actively printing. A loss of data or a malfunction can occur. |
| 2 Ethernet port |
Verifying printer setup
Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up correctly by printing the following:
- Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly. Remove the option and install it again.
- Network setup page—If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network, print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
Reports > Menu Settings Page
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Reports > Network Setup Page
2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning. Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer software
Note: If you installed the printer software on this computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall the current software first.
For Windows users
1 Close all open software programs.
2 Insert the installation software CD.
If the installation dialog screen does not appear after a minute, then launch the CD manually:
a Click , or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run box, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
For Macintosh users
1 Close all open applications.
2 Insert the installation software CD.
If the installation dialog does not appear after a minute, then click the CD icon on the desktop.
3 Double-click the software installer package, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Using the Internet
1 Go to the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
2 Navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOADS > select your printer > select your operating system
3 Download the driver and install the printer software.
Note: Updated printer software may be available at http://support.lexmark.com.
Updating available options in the printer driver
Once the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs.
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder:
a Click 📋, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run box, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Select the printer.
3 Right-click the printer, and then select Properties.
4 Click the Configuration tab.
5 Click Update Now - Ask Printer or manually add any installed hardware options under Configuration Options.
6 Click Apply.
For Macintosh users
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
2 Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Go > Applications > Utilities
2 Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 Select your printer.
4 From the Printers menu, choose Show Info.
5 Add any installed hardware options, and then click Apply Changes.
Setting up wireless printing
Note: A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wireless Encryption Protocol (WEP) and Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) are types of security used on a network.
Information you will need to set up the printer on a wireless network
Note: Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.
- SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
- Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc.
- Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to auto for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the auto setting. Check with your system support person if you are not sure which channel to select.
• Security Method—There are three basic options for Security Method:
—WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key currently in use on the network by selecting the Default WEP Transmit Key.
or
—WPA or WPA2 passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the network.
—No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network using the Advanced method, then you may need the following:
- Authentication type
•Inner authentication type
•802.1X username and password
•Certificates
Note: For more information on configuring 802.1X security, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)
Before installing the printer on a wireless network, make sure:
- Your wireless network is set up and working properly.
- The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.
1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn the printer on.
text_image
Diagram showing a device with labeled components and connection points, including numbered annotations 1 and 2.
natural_image
Diagram of a device with a magnified circular inset showing a red arrow pointing to a device (no text or symbols present)
Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready.
Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the computer screen.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4 Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type.
5 From the Wireless Configuration dialog, select Guided Setup (Recommended).
Note: Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation.
6 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.
natural_image
Diagram showing connection between a computer and a device with two close-up insets highlighting internal components (no text or symbols present)Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so you can print wirelessly.
7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: For more information on allowing other computers on the network to use the wireless printer, see the Networking Guide.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)
Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable when installing the printer on a wireless network.
Prepare to configure the printer
1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn the printer on.
text_image
Diagram showing a printer with labeled connection points, including a cable and a separate plug.
natural_image
Diagram of a device with a circular inset showing a highlighted component, no text or symbols present2 Locate the printer MAC address.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
Reports > Network Setup Page
b In the Standard Network Card section, look for UAA (MAC).
Note: You will need this information later.
Enter the printer information
1 Access the AirPort options:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Network > AirPort
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort
2 From the Network Name pop-up menu, select print server [yyyyy], where the y's are the last six digits of the MAC address located on the MAC address sheet.
3 Open a Web browser.
4 From the Bookmarks menu, select Show or Show All Bookmarks.
5 Under COLLECTIONS, select Bonjour or Rendezvous, and then double-click the printer name.
Note: The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10.2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc.
6 From the Embedded Web Server, navigate to where the wireless settings information are stored.
Configure the printer for wireless access
1 Type the network name (SSID) in the appropriate field.
2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode setting if you are using an access point (wireless router).
3 Select the type of security you want to use to protect your wireless network.
4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to connect to the wireless network.
5 Click Submit.
6 Open the AirPort application on your computer:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Network > AirPort
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort
7 From the Network pop-up menu, select the name of your wireless network.
Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly
To print on a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom printer driver file and create a print queue in the Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
1 Install a printer driver file on the computer:
a Insert the Software and Documentation CD, and then double-click the installer package for the printer.
b Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
c Select a destination, and then click Continue.
d From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
e Type the user password, and then click OK.
All necessary applications are installed in the computer.
f Click Close when installation is complete.
2 Add the printer:
a For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to: System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then click the IP tab.
3 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
1 From the Finder, navigate to: Applications > Utilities
2 Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, choose Add, and then click IP Printer.
4 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.
b For AppleTalk printing:
Note: Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to: System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
1 From the Finder, navigate to: Applications > Utilities
2 Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, click Add.
4 Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.
5 From the first pop-up menu, select AppleTalk.
6 From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
7 Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.
Installing the printer on a wired network
These instructions apply to Ethernet and fiber optic network connections.
Note: Make sure you have completed the initial setup of the printer.
For Windows users
1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
If the installation screen does not appear after a minute, then launch the CD manually:
a Click 📄, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run box, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of the CD or DVD drive.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: To configure the printer using a static IP address, IPv6, or scripts, select Advanced Options > Administrator Tools.
3 Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.
4 Attach the appropriate cable to the computer and to the printer when instructed to do so.
5 Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.
Note: If the configured printer does not appear on the list, then click Modify Search.
6 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
For Macintosh users
1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2 Obtain the printer IP address. You can:
a View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
b Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
3 Install the printer drivers, and then add the printer.
a Install a printer driver file on the computer:
1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD, and then double-click the installer package for the printer.
2 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3 Select a destination, and then click Continue.
4 From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
5 Type the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary applications are installed in the computer.
6 Click Close when installation is complete.
b Add the printer:
- For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to: System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then click the IP tab.
3 Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, click Add, and then click IP Printer.
4 Type in the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
- For AppleTalk printing:
Note: Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, click Add.
4 Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.
5 From the first pop-up menu, select AppleTalk.
6 From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
7 Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.
Note: If the printer does not show up in the list, then you may need to add it using the IP address. For more information, contact your system support person.
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port
When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on computers that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access the printer must be updated with this new IP address.
Notes:
- If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
- If the computers are configured to use network name that will stay the same, instead of by IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to your computer configurations.
- If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection, then make sure the wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If the wired connection remains connected, then the wireless configuration will complete, but the wireless ISP will not be active. In the event that the printer was configured for a wireless ISP while still attached to a wired connection, disconnect the wired connection, turn the printer off, and then turn the printer back on again. This will enable the wireless ISP.
- Only one network connection at a time is active. If you want to switch the connection type between wired and wireless, you must first turn the printer off, connect the cable (to switch to a wired connection) or disconnect the cable (to switch to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer on.
For Windows users
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click 📄, or click Start and then click Run.
3 In the Start Search or Run box, type control printers.
4 Press Enter, or click OK.
The printer folder opens.
5 Locate the printer that has changed.
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.
6 Right-click the printer.
7 Click Properties > Ports tab.
8 Select the port from the list, and then click Configure Port.
9 Type the new IP address in the "Printer Name or IP Address" field.
10 Click OK > Close.
For Macintosh users
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
2 Add the printer:
- For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
a From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +, and then click the IP tab.
c Type the IP address of your printer in the Address field, and then click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
a From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
b Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
c From the Printer List, click Add, and then click IP Printer.
d Type the IP address of your printer in the Address field, and then click Add.
•For AppleTalk printing:
Note: Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
In Mac OS X version 10.5
a From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
a From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
b Double-click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
c From the Printer List, click Add.
d Click the Default Browser tab > More Printers.
e From the first pop-up menu, select AppleTalk.
f From the second pop-up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
g Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.
Setting up serial printing
In serial printing, data is transferred one bit at a time. Although serial printing is usually slower than parallel printing, it is the preferred option when there is a great deal of distance between the printer and computer or when an interface with a better transfer rate is not available.
After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the printer and the computer so they can communicate. Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer.
1 Set the parameters in the printer:
a From the printer control panel, navigate to the menu with port settings.
b Locate the menu with serial port settings.
c Make any necessary changes to the serial settings.
d Save the new settings, and then print a menu settings page.
2 Install the printer driver:
a Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
If the installation screen does not appear after a minute, then launch the CD manually::
1 Click , or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run box, type D:\setup.exe, where D is the letter of the CD or DVD drive.
3 Press Enter, or click OK.
b Click Advanced Options > Custom Install.
c Follow the instructions on the computer screen
d From the Configure Printer Connection dialog, select Connect through a port discovered on your computer, and then select a port.
e If the port is not in the list, then click Refresh.
or
Navigate to:
Add port > select a port type > enter necessary information > OK
f Click Continue.
1 If you want to add another printer, then click Add Another.
2 If you want to make changes, then select a printer, and then click Edit.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
g Click Finish.
3 Set the COM port parameters:
After installing the printer driver, set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver.
Note: Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer.
a Open the Device Manager.
1 Click 📄, or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run box, type devmgmt.msc.
3 Press Enter, or click OK.
b Look for Ports, and then click + to expand the list of available ports.
c Right-click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
d Click Properties.
e On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters in the printer.
Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings.
f Click OK, and then close all the windows.
g Print a test page to verify printer installation.
Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
•The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see "Using Eco-Mode".
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled paper and other office papers” on page 86.
Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports duplex printing, you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper by selecting 2-sided printing from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar.
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N-Up) section of the Print dialog screen.
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
- Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or from the Lexmark Toolbar to see how the document will look like before you print it.
- Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Avoid paper jams
Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 257.
Print in black and white
To print all text and graphics using only the black print cartridge, set the printer to Black Only. For more information, see “Printing in black and white” on page 93.
Saving energy
Using Eco-Mode
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco-Mode > select a setting > Submit.
| Choose To | |
| Off | Use factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco-Mode. This setting supports the performance specifications of your printer. |
| Energy Reduce | energy use, especially when the printer is idle.The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.When the printer enters Sleep mode, the printer control panel display and the standard exit bin lights are turned off.If scanning is supported, then the scanner lamps are activated only when a scan job is started. |
| Energy/Paper | Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode. |
| Paper | Enable the automatic duplex feature.Turn off print log features. |
Reducing printer noise
To select a Quiet Mode setting using the Embedded Web Server:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting > Submit.
| Choose To | |
| OffNote: Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing. | Use factory default settings. This setting supports the performance specifications of your printer. |
| On Reduce printer noise. | Print jobs will process at a reduced speed.Print engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. There will be a short delay before the first page is printed.If your printer has faxing capability, fax sounds are reduced or disabled, including those made by the fax speaker and ringer. The fax is placed in standby mode.The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned off.The printer will ignore the Advance Start command. |
Adjusting Sleep Mode
To save energy, you can decrease the number of minutes before the printer enters Sleep Mode.
Available settings range from 1–240 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3 In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
2 Touch the arrows next to Sleep Mode to select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.
3 Touch Submit.
Using Hibernate Mode
Hibernate is an ultra-low power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.
3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop-down, select Hibernate.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button > Hibernate
2 Touch Submit.
Adjusting the brightness of the display
To save energy, or if you have trouble reading your display, then adjust the brightness of the display.
Available settings range from 20–100. The factory default setting is 100.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings
2 Touch the arrows until Screen Brightness appears, and then select a setting.
3 Touch Submit.
Setting the standard exit bin light
To save energy, you can dim or turn off the output lighting for the standard exit bin.
Available settings are Off, Dim, and Bright.
The factory default setting for Normal/Standby Mode is Bright.
When Eco-Mode is set to Energy or Energy/Paper, then the light setting is Dim.
When in Sleep Mode, then the light is off.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Output Lighting.
3 From the Normal/Standby Mode list, select the light setting for the standard exit bin when in Ready or Standby mode.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Output Lighting
2 Touch the arrow button next to Normal/Standby Mode to select the light settings for the standard exit bin when in Ready or Standby Mode.
3 Touch Submit.
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information, see:
•The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1 Visit our Web site at www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in a Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:
1 Visit our Web site at www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Loading paper and specialty media
This section explains how to load the 550-sheet trays, the 2,000-sheet tray, and the multipurpose feeder. It also includes information about paper orientation, setting the Paper Size and Paper Type, and linking and unlinking trays.
Setting the paper size and type
The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the multipurpose feeder. The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size menu. The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper.
From the home screen navigate to:
Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal Paper Size is a user-defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:
- Units of Measure
- Portrait Width
- Portrait Height
Notes:
•The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 1219 mm (8.5 x 48 in.).
- The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) and loaded in the multipurpose feeder only.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height > select the width or height > Submit
Loading the standard or optional 550-sheet tray
The printer has one standard 550-sheet tray (Tray 1), and may have one or more optional 550-sheet trays. All 550-sheet trays support the same paper sizes and types.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.
1 Pull the tray out.
natural_image
Illustration of a printer with an open door and internal components, showing no text or symbols.Notice the size indicators on the bottom of the tray. Use these indicators to help position the length and width guides.
text_image
Technical diagram of a device with labeled ports and zoomed-in insets showing internal components and measurement indicators.2 Squeeze and then slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
natural_image
3D diagram of a printer internal structure with highlighted components and red arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)3 Squeeze and then slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
Note: The length guide has a locking device. To unlock, push the button on top of the length guide backward. To lock, push the button forward when a length has been selected.
text_image
Diagram showing a device with three labeled arrows indicating process flow, including numbered annotations 1, 2, and 3.4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
natural_image
Illustration of hands holding a folded paper or document with red directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)
natural_image
Illustration of hands holding a curved object with bidirectional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)5 Load the paper stack with the recommended print side faceup.
Notes:
- Place the print side facedown for duplex printing.
- Place pre-punched paper with the holes toward the front of the tray.
- Place letterheads faceup with the header on the left side of the tray.
- Place letterheads facedown with the header on the right side of the tray for duplex printing.
- Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray. Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
natural_image
Diagram of a computer case with an open lid and a magnified inset showing a button labeled '↑' (no text or symbols on the main diagram)6 Insert the tray.
natural_image
Illustration of a printer with a paper feed into a paper holder, showing internal components and a red arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols present)7 From the printer control panel, verify the Paper Size and Paper Type for the tray based on the paper you loaded.
Loading the 2000-sheet high-capacity feeder
The high-capacity feeder can hold up to 2,000 sheets of A4-, letter-, or legal-size paper (80 g/m ^2 or 20 lb).
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.
1 Pull the tray out.
natural_image
Illustration of an open computer with a red downward arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols present)2 Adjust the width guide as necessary.
text_image
Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with labeled parts and an inset view of the device's internal compartment.3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
natural_image
Two illustrations showing hands folding a folded paper or document with red directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols present)4 Load paper into the tray with the print side faceup.
text_image
ABCNote: Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray. Overloading the tray can cause paper jams.
natural_image
Diagram of a printer internal structure showing paper feed, paper tray, and paper holder (no text or symbols)Notes:
- Place pre-punched paper with the holes toward the front of the tray.
- Place letterheads faceup with the header on the left side of the tray.
- Place letterheads facedown with the header on the right side of the tray for duplex printing.
5 Insert the tray.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
The multipurpose feeder can hold several sizes and types of print media, such as transparencies, labels, card stock, and envelopes. It can be used for single-page or manual printing, or as an additional tray.
The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately:
•100 sheets of 75-g/m ^2 (20-lb) paper
•10 envelopes
•75 transparencies
The multipurpose feeder accepts paper or specialty media within the following dimensions:
-Width—89 mm (3.5 in.) to 229 mm (9.02 in.)
•Length—127 mm (5 in.) to 1270 mm (50 in.)
Note: Maximum width and length can be applied only to short-edge feeding.
Note: Do not add or remove paper or specialty media when the printer is printing from the multipurpose feeder or when the printer control panel indicator light is blinking. Doing so may cause a jam.
1 Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
natural_image
Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with a red arrow indicating compression or disassembly (no text or symbols present)2 For paper or specialty media that is longer than letter-size paper, gently pull the extension until it is fully extended.
natural_image
Diagram of a printer's internal structure showing a printer attachment and a yellow clip, with no visible text or symbols.3 Flex the sheets of paper or specialty media back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Paper
natural_image
Two illustrations showing hands folding a curved object with red directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)Envelopes
natural_image
Two-step illustration showing hands holding a device and exchanging a closed envelope (no text or symbols)Transparencies
Note: Avoid scratching or touching the print side.
natural_image
Illustration showing two hand positions: one holding a flat sheet, the other holding a curved paper with red directional arrows (no text or symbols)4 Push the paper pick tab, and then load the paper or specialty media. Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop, and then release the paper pick tab.
text_image
Diagram showing printer printing process with numbered callouts highlighting the process and directional arrowsWarning—Potential Damage: Pulling the paper out, without pushing the paper pick tab first, may cause jams or the paper pick tab to break.
- Load paper and transparencies with the recommended print side facedown and the short edge entering the printer first.
- For duplex letterhead printing, place the letterhead faceup and the header entering the printer last.
- Load envelopes with the flap side up and to the right.
natural_image
Diagram of a printer's internal structure with arrows indicating loading or movement (no text or symbols present)Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or self-stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
Notes:
- Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper or transparencies under the stack height limiter.
- Load only one size and type of paper at a time.
5 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the stack. Make sure the paper or specialty media fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.
natural_image
Diagram showing a printer or printer with a paper sheet being inserted, no text or symbols present6 From the printer control panel, set the Paper Size and Paper Type for the multipurpose feeder (MP Feeder Size and MP Feeder Type) based on the paper or specialty media loaded.
Linking and unlinking trays
Linking trays
Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds from the next linked tray. When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are automatically linked.
The printer automatically senses the Paper Size setting according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the standard 550-sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder. The printer can sense A4, A5, JIS B5, Letter, Legal, Executive, and Universal paper sizes. The multipurpose feeder and trays using other paper sizes can be linked manually using the Paper Size menu available from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: To link the multipurpose feeder, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in the Paper menu in order for MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item.
The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu available from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Unlinking trays
Note: Trays that do not have the same settings as any other tray are not linked.
Change one of the following tray settings:
•Paper Type
Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked trays, assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type [x], or define your own custom name.
•Paper Size
Load a different paper size to automatically change the Paper Size setting for a tray. Paper Size settings for the multipurpose feeder are not automatic; they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper loaded in a tray. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Prints may not be properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.
Linking exit bins
Link exit bins to create a single output source. The printer automatically uses the next available bin as the output source.
The standard exit bin holds up to 550 sheets of 20-lb paper. If you need additional output capacity, you can purchase other optional exit bins.
Note: Not all exit bins support every paper size and type.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Paper Menu > Bin Setup
2 Touch the bin or bins you want to link, and then touch Configure Bins > Link.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
If the printer is on a network, you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x] for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Name > type a name > Submit.
Note: This custom name will replace the Custom Type [x] name under the Custom Types and Paper Size and Type menus.
3 Click Custom Types > select a paper type > Submit.
Assigning a custom paper type name
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
From the home screen, navigate to:
Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a custom paper type name > select a tray > Submit
Configuring a custom name
If the printer is on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x] for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types > select the custom name you want to configure > select a paper or specialty media type > Submit.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock.
Weight
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 176-g / m^2 (16 to 47-lb) bond grain long. Paper lighter than 60~g / m^2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75-g / m^2 (20-lb) bond grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182× 257mm (7 x 10 in.), we recommend 90-g / m^2 (24-lb) or heavier paper.
Note: Duplex is supported only for 75–176-g/m ^2 (20–47-lb) bond paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, the toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points; however, smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly. Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–135-g/m ^2 (16–36-lb) bond paper, grain long paper is recommended. For papers heavier than 135 g/m ^2 , grain short is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Selecting paper
Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams and poor print quality:
•Always use new, undamaged paper.
- Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.
- Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
- Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.
- Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
- Use grain long for 60 to 90g / m^2 (16 to 24 lb) weight paper.
- Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
- Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190^ C ( 374^ F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.
When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190^ C ( 374^ F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted with rigor and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including the following:
- Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
- Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
- Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
- Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.
•Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray) -
Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
•Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated) -
Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves through the printer)
•Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner, they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as colorants and “glue” often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However, using recycled papers enables better resource management overall.
Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products. To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor (up to 80%) of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This is due to the energy-intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled paper is one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-equipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter's product list for special applications is maintained. However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing:
1 Minimize paper consumption.
2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.
3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m ^-2 certified paper, lower weight paper, or recycled paper.
Unacceptable paper examples
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:
- Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
•Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the paper - Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
- Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm ( ± 0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.)
•Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
- Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
•Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
•Paper weighing less than 60 g/m ^2 (16 lb)
•Multiple part forms or documents
For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can be found at the Environmental Sustainability link.
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
- For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21^ C ( 70^ F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24^ C (65 to 75^ F) with relative humidity between 40 and 60%.
- Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
- Store individual packages on a flat surface.
- Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper input sources and the types of paper they support.
Note: To use a paper size that is unlisted, configure a Universal Paper Size.
Supported paper sizes
Measurements apply to simplex (one-sided) printing only. For duplex (two-sided) printing, the minimum size is 139.7 x 210 mm (5.50 x 8.27 in.).
| Paper size Dimensions Standard | 550-sheet tray (Tray 1) | Optional 550-sheet tray | Optional 2,000-sheet tray | Multipurpose feeder | Duplexer | |
| A4 210 x 297 mm | (8.27 x 11.7 in.) | √ | √ | √ | √ | √ |
| A5 148 x 210 mm | (5.83 x 8.27 in.) | √ | √ | X | √ | √ |
| A6 105 x 148 mm | (4.13 x 5.83 in.) | X | X | X | √ X | |
| JIS B5 182 x 257 mm | (7.17 x 10.1 in.) | √ | √ | X | √ | √ |
| Letter 215.9 x 279 | .4 mm(8.5 x 11 in.) | √ | √ | √ | √ | √ |
| Legal 215.9 x 355.6 | mm(8.5 x 14 in.) | √ | √ | √ | √ | √ |
| Executive 184.2 x | 266.7 mm(7.25 x 10.5 in.) | √ | √ | X | √ | √ |
| Oficio (México) 21 | 5.9 x 340.4 mm(8.5 x 13.4 in.) | √ | √ | X | √ | √ |
^1 Supported by X790 models only.
^2 This formats the envelope size setting for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software application.
| Paper size Dimensions | Standard | 550-sheet tray (Tray 1) | Optional 550-sheet tray | Optional 2,000-sheet tray | Multipurpose feeder | Duplexer |
| Folio 215.9 x 330.2 mm(8.5 x 13 in.) | √ | √ | X | √ | √ | |
| Statement 139.7 x | 215.9 mm(5.5 x 8.5 in.) | √ | √ | X | √ | √ |
| Universal Note: Turn size sensing off to support universal sizes that are close to standard media sizes. | 148 x 210 mm to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in. to 8.5 x 14 in.) | √ | √ | X | √ | √ |
| 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) | X | X | X | √ | X | |
| 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) to 215.9 x 914.4 mm (8.5 x 36 in.) ^1 | X | X | X | √ | X | |
| 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.) to 215.9 x 1219.2 mm (8.5 x 48 in.) ^1 | X | X | X | √ | X | |
| 7 3/4 Envelope (Monarch) | 98.4 x 190.5 mm (3.875 x 7.5 in.) | X | X | X | √ | X |
| 9 Envelope 98.4 x | 226.1 mm(3.875 x 8.9 in.) | X | X | X | √ | X |
| Com 10 Envelope | 104.8 x 241.3 mm (4.12 x 9.5 in.) | X | X | X | √ | X |
| DL Envelope 110 x | 220 mm(4.33 x 8.66 in.) | X | X | X | √ | X |
| C5 Envelope 162 x | 229 mm(6.38 x 9.01 in.) | X | X | X | √ | X |
| B5 Envelope 176 x | 250 mm(6.93 x 9.84 in.) | X | X | X | √ | X |
| Other Envelope ^2 | 85.7 x 165 mm to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (3.375 x 6.50 in. to 8.5 x 14 in.) | X | X | X | √ | X |
| ^1 Supported by X790 models only. ^2 This formats the envelope size setting for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software application. | ||||||
Supported paper types and weights
The printer supports 60–176 g/m ^2 (16–47 lb) paper weights for one-sided printing. Two-sided printing is supported on 64–176 g/m ^2 (17–47 lb) paper weights.
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
| Paper type Standard | 550-sheet tray (Tray 1) | Optional 550-sheet tray | Optional 2,000-sheet tray | Multipurpose feeder | Duplexer |
| Paper•Plain•Recycled•Glossy•Heavy Glossy•Bond•Letterhead•Preprinted•Colored•Light•Heavy•Rough/Cotton•Custom Type [x] | √ | √ | √ | √ | √ |
| Card stock X | √ | √ | √ | √ | |
| Transparencies ^1,2 | X | X | X | √ | X |
| Labels ^3 •Paper•Vinyl | √ | √ | X | √ | √ |
| Envelopes ^4 | X | X | X | √ | X |
| ^1 This media is supported only in the multipurpose feeder. ^2 Do not use inkjet or 3M CG3710 transparencies. ^3 Paper labels are supported. Other media such as vinyl may show print quality defects in some environments, and prolonged vinyl label usage may reduce fuser life. For more information, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site athttp://support.lexmark.com. ^4 Use envelopes that lie flat when individually placed facedown on a table. | |||||
Supported finishing features
The printer supports the following finishing features:
- 500-Sheet Offset Stacker
•500-Sheet Staple Finisher
•500-Sheet Staple, Hole Punch Finisher
- 5-bin mailbox
text_image
Technical diagram of a multi-tiered printer with labeled parts 1 and 2| 1 Standard bin |
| 2 Finisher bin |
Standard bin
•The paper capacity is 500 sheets.
•Finishing options are not supported in this bin.
•Envelopes are routed here.
Finisher bin
•The paper capacity is 500 sheets.
- Envelopes, A5, A6 and statement paper sizes are not supported in this bin.
Finishing features
| Paper size | Two-hole punch | Three- or four-hole punch | 5-bin mailbox 500-Sheet | StapleFinisher |
| A4 | √ | √ | √ | √ |
| A5 X X X | √ | |||
| Executive | √ | √ | √ | √ |
| Folio X | √ | √ | √ | |
| JIS B5 | √ | √ | √ | √ |
| Legal | √ | √ | √ | √ |
| Letter | √ | √ | √ | √ |
| Statement X X | √ | √ | ||
| Universal X X | √ | √ | ||
| Envelopes (any size) X X X | √ | |||
| Oficio | √ | √ | √ | √ |
Printing
This chapter covers printing, printer reports, and job cancelation. The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 257 and “Storing paper” on page 88.
Printing a document
Printing a document
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, set the Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper.
2 Send the print job:
For Windows users
a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust settings as necessary.
d Click OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the Print dialog and pop-up menus, adjust the settings as needed.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper, or select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3 Click Print.
Printing in black and white
From the home screen, navigate to:
Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Print Mode > Black Only > Submit
Adjusting toner darkness
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3 Adjust the toner darkness setting.
4 Click Submit.
Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
- Before printing an encrypted PDF file, enter the file password from the printer control panel.
- You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
The USB Drive home screen appears.
natural_image
Illustration of a printer with a blue tool pointing to a small component on the cover (no text or symbols visible)Notes:
- If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the printer ignores the flash drive.
- If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
text_image
Diagram showing a printer with a prohibition sign indicating no anti-smoking, featuring a crossed-out tool and a blue pushpin.Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, any connector, the memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. A loss of data can occur.
2 From the printer control panel, touch Print from USB, and then select the document you want to print.
3 Touch the arrows to increase the number of copies to print, and then touch Print.
Notes:
- Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
- If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print files from the flash drive as held jobs.
Supported flash drives and file types
| Flash drive File type | |
| Lexar JumpDrive 2.0 Pro (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)SanDisk Cruzer Mini (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)Notes:Hi-Speed USB flash drives must support the Full-Speed standard. Devices supporting only USB low-speed capabilities are not supported.USB flash drives must support the FAT (File Allocation Tables) system. Devices formatted with NTFS (New Technology File System) or any other file system are not supported. | Documents: .pdf.xpsImages: .dcx.gif.JPEG.jpg.bmp.pcx.TIFF.tif.png |
Printing on specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
- Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
- Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
- Before loading letterhead, flex the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
- Observe proper page orientation.
| Source Print side Paper orientation | ||
| Standard 550-sheet trayOptional 550-sheet trayOptional 2000-sheet high-capacity feeder | Preprinted letterhead design is placed faceup. | The top edge of the sheet with the logo is placed at the left side of the tray. |
| Duplex (two-sided) printing from trays | Preprinted letterhead design is placed facedown. | The top edge of the sheet with the logo is placed at the right side of the tray. |
| Multipurpose feeder (simplex printing) | Preprinted letterhead design is placed facedown. | The top edge of the sheet with the logo should enter the multipurpose feeder first. |
| Multipurpose feeder (duplex printing) | Preprinted letterhead design is placed faceup. | The top edge of the sheet with the logo should enter the multipurpose feeder last. |
| Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for laser printers. | ||
Tips on using transparencies
- Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
- Feed transparencies from the multipurpose feeder only.
- From the Paper menu, set the MP Feeder Type to Transparency.
- Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Transparencies must be able to withstand temperatures of 230°C (446°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.
- To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.
- Before loading transparencies, flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
- We recommend Lexmark transparencies. For ordering information, see the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
Tips on using envelopes
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
- Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or releasing hazardous emissions.
- For best performance, use envelopes made from 90-g/m ^2 (24-lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All-cotton envelopes must not exceed 70-g/m ^2 (20-lb bond) weight.
- Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
- To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
—Have excessive curl or twist.
—Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
—Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
—Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
—Have an interlocking design.
—Have postage stamps attached.
—Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
—Have bent corners.
—Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.
- Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Tips on using labels
Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Note: Paper labels are supported. Other media such as vinyl may show print quality defects in some environments, and prolonged vinyl label usage may reduce fuser life.
For detailed information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
When printing on labels:
- Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:
- The labels can withstand temperatures up to 190^ (374°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
— Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure without delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.
- Do not use labels with slick backing material.
- Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.
- Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
- Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.
- Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.) away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.
- If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge, and use a non-oozing adhesive.
- Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single-ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness, and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on card stock:
•Make sure the Paper Type is Card Stock.
- Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
- Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper-handling problems.
- Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 190°C (374°F) without releasing hazardous emissions.
- Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting introduces semi-liquid and volatile components into the printer.
- Use grain short card stock when possible.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer control panel.
All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to process additional held jobs.
| Print job type Description | |
| Confidential Confidential lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the control panel.Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the numbers 0–9. | |
| Verify Verify lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed. | |
| Reserve Reserve allows the printer to store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print jobs are held until deleted from the Help Jobs menu. | |
| Repeat | Repeat prints and stores print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting. |
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve jobs are held in the printer until you choose to delete them.
For Windows Users
1 With a document open, click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
2 Click Other Options > Print and Hold.
3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four-digit PIN.
4 Click OK or Print.
5 Go to the printer to release the print job.
From the home screen:
•For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > Confidential Jobs > your PIN > your print job name > number of copies > Print
•For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > your print job name > number of copies > Print
For Macintosh users
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop-up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select your print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential print job, also enter a four-digit PIN.
4 Click OK or Print.
5 Go to the printer to release the print job.
From the home screen:
- For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > Confidential Jobs > your PIN > your print job name > number of copies > Print
•For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > your print job name > number of copies > Print
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Reports > Print Fonts
2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
Reports > Print Directory
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen, or press ✗ on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder:
a Click , or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run box, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Double-click the printer icon.
3 Select the print job you want to cancel.
4 From the keyboard, press Delete.
For Macintosh users
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later:
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences > Print & Fax > Open Print Queue.
2 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel.
3 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier:
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Go > Applications
2 Double-click Utilities > Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
3 Double-click the printer icon.
4 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel.
5 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.
Copying
ADF Scanner glass
text_image
Diagram showing a printer with a document and a person icon, with a red arrow indicating a drop or error.Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.
text_image
Diagram showing a person scanning a document with a red dashed arrow indicating the process, labeled with a circled symbol.Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 Adjust the paper guides when loading a document into the ADF.
Note: Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same. Failure to set the proper size may result to a cropped image.
3 From the printer control panel, press to start copying.
Copying using the ADF
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 Adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It
Copying using the scanner glass
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It
4 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
3 If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Next Page.
Copying film photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo > √ > Photo/Film > √ > Copy It > Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job
Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > √
4 Touch Copy to, and then select the tray that contains transparencies, or touch Manual Feeder Size.
5 Load transparencies in the multipurpose feeder.
6 From the home screen, navigate to:
select the desired size of the transparencies > Manual Feeder Type > > Copy It
Copying on letterhead
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > Copy to > Manual Feeder
4 Place the letterhead faceup, top edge first in the multipurpose feeder.
5 Select the size of the letterhead.
6 Navigate to:
Continue > Letterhead > Continue > Copy It
Customizing copy settings
Copying in black and white
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Allow color copies > Off > √ > Submit
Copying to a different size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from > select the size of the original document > √.
5 Touch Copy to > select the size of the copy > √.
Note: The printer will scale the size automatically.
6 Touch Copy It.
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > Copy to
4 Touch Manual Feeder or select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use.
Note: If you choose Manual Feeder, then you will also need to select the paper size and type.
5 Touch Copy It.
Copying different paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the "Copy to" and "Copy from" settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes > ✓ > Copy to > Auto Size Match > ✓ > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.
Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes > ✓ > Copy to > Letter > ✓ > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on the paper size selected.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button for your preferred duplexing method.
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select 1-sided to 2-sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2-sided copies.
5 Touch √, and then Copy It.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
To reduce or enlarge a copy:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Scale area, touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies.
Touching "Copy to" or "Copy from" after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
5 Touch Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content
4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying:
- Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
- Graphic—Use when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
- Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
- Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
5 Touch
6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying:
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
- Black/White—Use when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.
- Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer.
- Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
- Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
- Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
- Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
- Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
7 Touch √ > Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated Not collated
By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > Off > √ > Copy It
Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Collate must be set to On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collate is set to Off, then the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job.
4 Select one of the following:
- Between Copies
- Between Jobs
- Between Pages
•None
5 Touch √, and then Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple-page document onto a single sheet of paper.
Notes:
•The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or JIS B5.
•The Copy Size must be set to 100%.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select desired output > √ > Copy It
Creating a custom copy job (job build)
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with the same or different parameters.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
- If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
- If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.
- If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
For example:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Options > Custom Job > On > Done > Copy It
When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
4 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.
Note: If required, change the job settings.
5 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.
Placing information on copies
Placing the date and time at the top of each page
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer
4 Pick an area of the page where you want to place the date and time.
5 Touch Yes or No > √ > Copy It.
Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom or Draft. To place a message on the copies:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message > √.
4 Touch Copy It.
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, the scanning screen appears. To cancel the copy job, touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.
A "Canceling scan job" screen appears. The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job.
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.
A "Canceling scan job" screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1 From the home screen, touch Cancel Job, or press ✗ on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Understanding the copy screens and options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size of the original document.
- Touch a paper size that matches the original document.
- Touch Mixed Sizes to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width.
- Touch Auto Size Sense to allow the scanner to automatically determine the size of the original document.
Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.
- Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
- If the settings for "Copy from" and "Copy to" are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting to accommodate the difference.
- If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder, and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.
- When "Copy to" is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a tray or multipurpose feeder.
Copies
This option allows you to set the number of copies to be printed.
Scale
This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale can also be set for you automatically.
- When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal-size to letter-size paper, setting the "Copy from" and "Copy to" paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information on your copy.
- Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1%; touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1%.
- Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change.
- Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex) of two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided copies (simplex) from two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2) (3,3,3).
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
- Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
- Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
- Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
- Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
- Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
- Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
- Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
- Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
- Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
-
Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
-
Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
- Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
- ADF Skew Fix—Use to correct slight skew in the scanned image.
- Advanced Duplex—Use to specify the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-sided, and how documents are bound.
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options are available only on select printers.
- Advanced Imaging—Use to change or adjust Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you copy the document.
- Create Booklet—Use to create a booklet. You can choose between 1-sided and 2-sided booklets.
Note: This option appears only when a print duplexer and printer hard disk are installed.
- Cover Page Setup—Use to set copy cover page and booklet cover page.
- Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
- Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
- Header/Footer—Use to turn on Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text, and prints them in the specified header or footer location.
- Margin Shift—Use to increase the size of the margin of an specified distance by shifting the scanned image. This can be useful in providing space to bind or hole-punch copies. Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of a margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.
- Overlay—Use to create a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose between Urgent, Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the "Enter custom text" field. The word you pick will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
Note: A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person. When a custom overlay is created, a button with an icon of that overlay will be available.
- Paper Saver—Use to print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page. Paper Saver is also called N-up printing. The N stands for Number. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page. Touching Print Page Borders adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page.
- Separator Sheets—Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.
- Separator Sheets—Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator she can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.
- Separator Sheets—Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator she can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.
- Separator Sheets—Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator she can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.
- Separator Sheets—Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator she can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.
- Separator Sheets—Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator she can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.
- Separator Sheets—Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator she can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are printed on.
Save As Shortcut
This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut by assigning a number.
E-mailing
ADF Scanner glass
text_image
Diagram showing a printer with a document and a person icon, indicating a user profile or registration.Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.
text_image
Diagram showing a person scanning a document with a red arrow indicating direction, labeled with a circled symbol.Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
You can use the printer to e-mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e-mail from the printer. You can type the e-mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.
Getting ready to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Default Settings, click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4 Click E-mail Settings > Setup E-mail Server.
5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
6 Click Submit.
Configuring e-mail settings
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
4 Click Submit.
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).
5 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).
6 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e-mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient's e-mail address.
2 Touch
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
E-mailing a document
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same. Failure to set the proper size may result to a cropped image.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient
4 Enter the e-mail address, or press # and then enter the shortcut number.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add.
Note: You can also enter an e-mail address using the address book.
5 Touch Done > Send It.
Sending an e-mail using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press #, enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch √.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add.
4 Touch Send It.
Sending an e-mail using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail >Recipient(s) > enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts
4 Touch the name of the recipients.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to add, or search the address book.
5 Touch Done.
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Type an e-mail address.
5 Touch Options > Subject.
6 Type the e-mail subject.
7 Touch Done > Message.
8 Type an e-mail message.
9 Touch Done > E-mail It.
Changing the output file type
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e-mail address > Send as
4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.
- PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www.adobe.com.
- Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
-
TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
-
JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs.
- XPS—Use this to create a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third-party standalone viewer.
5 Touch E-mail It.
Note: If you selected Secure PDF, you will be prompted to enter your password twice.
Canceling an e-mail
- When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning... appears.
- When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning... appears or while Scan the Next Page / Finish the Job appears.
Understanding e-mail options
Recipients
This option lets you enter the destination of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e-mail addresses.
Subject
This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail.
Message
This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.
- Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e-mail screen appears with the new setting displayed.
- When "Original Size" is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
- When "Original Size" is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document.
Resolution
Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.
Color
This option sets the output color for the scanned image. Touch to enable or disable color.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
- Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
- Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
- Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
- Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
- Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
- Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
- Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
- Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
- Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
- Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
- Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.
Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.
- PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www.adobe.com.
- Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
- TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
- JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs
- XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.
- Sides (Duplex)—Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
- Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match the orientation.
- Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change ADF Skew Fix, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Edge Erase, and Transmission Log settings.
- ADF Skew Fix—This lets you correct slight skew in the scanned image.
- Advanced Imaging—This lets you adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you e-mail the document.
- Custom Job—This lets you combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job
- Edge Erase—This lets you eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
- Transmission Log—This lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log
Faxing
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.
| ADF Scanner glass | |
 |  |
| Use the ADF for multiple-page documents. | Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings). |
Getting the printer ready to fax
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.
Note: During the initial printer setup, deselect Fax and any other function you plan to set up later, and then touch Continue. The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning storm.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or receiving a fax.
text_image
Diagram showing a device with a prohibition symbol and a close-up of its internal components, indicating no protection or disapproval.Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: station name (identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message) and station number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other entity, or individual).
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time, a series of start-up screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities, then the following screens appear:
Fax Name or Station Name
Fax Number or Station Number
1 When Fax Name or Station Name appears, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
2 After entering the Fax Name or Station Name, touch Submit.
3 When Fax Number or Station Number appears, enter the printer fax number.
4 After entering the Fax Number or Station Number, touch Submit.
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
- View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name or Station Name field, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Choosing a fax connection
Notes:
- The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the telephone wall outlet. Other devices(such as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as described in the setup steps.
- If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, then a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is required. Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter. The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone line that can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly.
- You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line to send and receive faxes.
| Equipment and service options Fax connection setup | |
| Connect directly to the telephone line. | See “Connecting to an analog telephone line” on page 123. |
| Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL or ADSL) service. | See “Connecting to a DSL service” on page 124. |
| Connect to a Private Branch eXchange (PBX) or Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) system. | See “Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system” on page 124. |
| Use a Distinctive Ring service. See “Connecting to a distinctive ring service” on page 125. | |
| Connect through an adapter used in your area. See “Connecting to an adapter for your country or region” on page 125. | |
Connecting to an analog telephone line
If your telecommunications equipment uses a US-style (RJ11) telephone line, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port ☐.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
natural_image
Diagram of an electronic device with a cable inserted into a socket, showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols)Connecting to a DSL service
If you subscribe to a DSL service, then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord, and then follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port ☐.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter.
Note: Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration.
3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack.
text_image
Diagram showing connection between a device and a power outlet, with labeled parts 1, 2, and 3.Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system
If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port ☐.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use.
Notes:
•Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region.
- Depending on the ISDN port assignment, you may have to connect to a specific port.
- When using a PBX system, make sure the call waiting tone is off.
- When using a PBX system, dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number.
- For more information on using the fax with a PBX system, see the documentation that came with your PBX system.
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider. This service allows you to have multiple telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port ☐.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
natural_image
Diagram of an electronic device with a cable inserted into a socket, showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols present)3 Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer:
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This allows the printer to answer single, double, and triple ring patterns.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Settings > Distinctive Rings
b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.
Connecting to an adapter for your country or region
The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone wall jack:
Country/Region
• Austria
•New Zealand
•Cyprus
•Netherlands
•Denmark
•Norway
•Finland
•Portugal
•France
•Sweden
•Germany
•Switzerland
• Ireland
•United Kingdom
•Italy
For some countries or regions, a telephone line adapter is included in the box. Use this adapter to connect an answering machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer.
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter, and then connect the adapter to the active telephone wall jack.
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your location.
natural_image
Diagram showing a printer with a cable inserted into a socket, connected to a wall-mounted switch (no text or symbols present)Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name or Station Name field, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, then you may have to reset the date and time.
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 In the Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4 Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 Select the Automatically Observe DST checkbox, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time Zone Setup section.
4 Click Submit.
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support person.
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
To create a multiple-number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4 Assign a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number
To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
4 Navigate to:
enter a name for the shortcut > Done > OK > Fax It
Sending a fax
Sending a fax using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.
To add recipients, touch Next Number and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or search the address book.
Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press ⏻. The dial pause appears as a comma in the "Fax to" box. Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.
5 Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the computer
The printer driver fax option allows you to "print to fax," where the printer will send a queued document as a fax rather than print it. The fax option functions as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of the printer control panel.
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Select the printer, and then navigate to:
Properties > Fax tab > Enable fax
3 Enter the recipient fax number(s) in the "Fax number(s)" field.
Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature.
4 If necessary, enter a prefix in the Dialing prefix field.
5 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.
6 If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and enter the appropriate information.
7 Click OK.
Notes:
- The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on installing these drivers, see the Software and Documentation CD.
- The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under Configuration tab before it can be used.
- If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you will be prompted to verify the recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is not selected, then the queued document will be sent automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.
Sending a fax using shortcuts
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. A shortcut number (1–99999) can contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press # , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4 Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the address book
The address book enables you to search for bookmarks and network directory servers.
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > Browse shortcuts
4 Using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find.
Note: Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.
5 Touch Done > Fax It.
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (slowest speed, best quality).
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want.
5 Touch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 From the Darkness area, touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax.
5 Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Advanced Options > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission are listed in the Fax Queue.
4 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted.
The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, the left arrow is unavailable.
5 Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Viewing a fax log
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Reports > Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
- This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.
- In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
- When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning... appears.
- When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning... appears or while Scan the Next Page/Finish the Job appears.
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.
Understanding fax options
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
- Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
- Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
- Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
- Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
- Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
- Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
- Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
- Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
- Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
- Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
- Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
- Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Resolution
This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, then increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.
•Standard—Suitable for most documents
- Fine 200 dpi—Recommended for documents with small print
- Super fine 300 dpi—Recommended for original documents with fine detail
- Ultra fine 600 dpi—Recommended for documents with pictures or photos
Note: Fine 200 dpi and Super fine 300 dpi is displayed when color printing is selected.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.
Color
This option enables or disables color in faxing.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding settings.
- Sides (Duplex)—Use to specify if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
- Orientation—Use to specify the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match the orientation.
- Binding—Use to specify if the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Delayed Send
This lets you send a fax at a later time or date.
1 Set up your fax.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Delayed Send > enter the date and time you want to send your fax > Done
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, then the fax is sent the next time the printer is turned on.
This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours, or when transmission times are cheaper.
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
- ADF Skew Fix—Use to correct slight skew in the scanned image.
- Advanced Imaging—Use to adjust the Background Removal, Contrast, Color Balance, Negative Image, Mirror Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you fax the document.
- Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
- Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
- Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3 In the Print Faxes Password field, enter a password.
4 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
•Off
•Always On
•Manual
•Scheduled
5 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
6 Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e-mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select one of the following:
•Print
•Print and Forward
•Forward
4 From the "Forward to" menu, select one of the following:
- Fax
- E-mail
- FTP
- LDSS
- eSF
5 In the Forward to Shortcut field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the "Forward to" menu.
6 Click Submit.
Scanning to an FTP address
ADF Scanner glass
text_image
Diagram showing printer printing a document with a red arrow and a person icon, likely illustrating a print or documentation process.Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.
text_image
Diagram illustrating a person's identity verification process with a person icon and red arrow indicating direction of verification.Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be sent to the server at a time.
Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes available as a shortcut number. An FTP destination could also be another printer; for example, a color document can be scanned and then sent to a color printer.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the touch screen
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Send It
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4 Touch Send It.
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts > name of recipient > Search
Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server or using the printer touch screen.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support person.
4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup.
5 Enter the appropriate information.
6 Enter a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
7 Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > type the FTP address > /* > enter a name for the shortcut > Done
2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
3 Touch Submit.
Understanding FTP options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: Addresses should be in dot notation form (for example: yyy·yyy·yyy·yyy).
File Name
This option lets you enter the file name of the scanned document.
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents for FTP sending.
- Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The FTP screen appears with the new setting displayed.
- When "Original Size" is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
- When "Original Size" is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document.
Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.
- PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by Adobe at www.adobe.com.
- Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
- TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
- JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers and graphics programs
- XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your files will turn out in relation to the original document.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.
- Sides (Duplex)—Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned.
- Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides and Binding settings to match the orientation.
- Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge side.
Content
This option tells the printer the original document type and source.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphic.
- Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
- Graphic—Use when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
- Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
- Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press or Other.
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
- Black/White—Use when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.
- Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
- Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
- Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
- Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
- Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
- Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the original document before it is scanned completely. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
- ADF Skew Fix—Use to correct slight skew in the scanned image.
- Advanced Imaging—Use to adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality, Negative Image, Mirror Image, Scan edge to edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature image output settings before sending the image file.
- Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
- Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
- Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
ADF Scanner glass
text_image
Diagram showing a printer with a document and a person icon, with a red arrow indicating a drop or error.Use the ADF for multiple-page documents.
text_image
Diagram illustrating a person's identity verification process with a person icon and red arrow indicating directionUse the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.
Scanning to a computer
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Scan Profile > Create.
3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.
5 Enter a scan name.
The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
6 Click Submit.
7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. You can use this shortcut number when you are ready to scan your documents.
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
b If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
c Press # , and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, or touch Held Jobs on the home screen, and then touch Profiles.
d After entering the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program you specified. If you touched Profiles on the home screen, then locate your shortcut on the list.
8 Return to the computer to view the file.
The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.
Scanning to a flash drive
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
The USB Drive home screen appears.
4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
5 Adjust the scan settings.
6 Touch Scan It.
Understanding the Scan Center features
The Scan Center software lets you modify scan settings and select where to send the scanned output. Scan settings modified with the Scan Center software can be saved and used for other scan jobs.
The following features are available:
- Scan and send images to your computer
- Convert scanned images to text
- Preview the scanned image and adjust the brightness and contrast
•Make larger scans without losing detail - Scan two-sided documents
Using the ScanBack Utility
You can use the Lexmark ScanBack™ Utility to create scan-to-PC profiles. The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from the Lexmark Web site on http://support.lexmark.com.
1 Set up a scan-to-PC profile:
a Launch the ScanBack Utility.
b Select the printer.
If no printers are listed, then contact your system support person, or click Setup to manually search for an IP address or host name.
c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind of output you want to create.
d Select any of the following:
- Show MFP Instructions—View or print the instructions.
- Create Shortcut—Save this group of settings to use again.
e Click Finish.
A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.
2 Scan original documents:
a Load all pages in the ADF or on the scanner glass.
b From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Scan/Email > Profiles > select your scan profile > Submit
Note: The output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.
Understanding scan profile options
Original Size
This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter- and legal-size pages).
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
- Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
- Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
- Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
- Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
- Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
- Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
- Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
- Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
- Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
- Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
- Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.
- Sides (Duplex)—Use this to specify if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
- Orientation— Use this to specify the orientation of the original document, and then change Sides and Binding to match the orientation.
- Binding— Use this to specify if the original document is bound on the long-edge or short-edge of the page.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
- ADF Skew Fix— Use this to correct slight skew in the scanned image.
- Advanced Imaging— Use this to change or adjust Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature before scanning a document.
- Custom Job—Use this to combine multiple scan jobs into a single scan job.
- Edge Erase—Use this to remove smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scanned image.
- Transmission Log—Use this to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Understanding printer menus
Menus list
Supplies Paper Menu Reports Settings
| Replace Supply | Default Source | Menu Settings Page | General Settings |
| Cyan Cartridge | Paper Size/Type | Device Statistics | Copy Settings |
| Magenta Cartridge | Configure MP | Network Setup Page | Fax Settings |
| Yellow Cartridge | Substitute Size | Network [x] Setup Page | E-mail Settings |
| Black Cartridge | Paper Texture | Shortcut List | FTP Settings |
| Separator Pick Assembly and Roller | Paper Weight | Fax Job Log | Flash Drive Menu |
| Waste Toner Bottle | Paper Loading | Fax Call Log | Print Settings |
| Fuser | Custom Types | Copy Shortcuts | |
| Transfer Module | Custom Names | E-mail Shortcuts | |
| Staples | Custom Scan Sizes | Fax Shortcuts | |
| Hole Punch Box | Custom Bin Names | FTP Shortcuts | |
| Universal Setup | Profiles List | ||
| Bin Setup | Print Fonts | ||
| Print Directory | |||
| Asset Report |
Security Network/Ports Help Manage Shortcuts
| Edit Security Setups | Active NIC | Print All Guides | Fax Shortcuts |
| Miscellaneous Security Settings | Standard Network or Network [x] ^1 | Copy Guide | E-mail Shortcuts |
| Confidential Print | Standard USB | E-mail Guide | FTP Shortcuts |
| Disk Wiping | Parallel [x] | Fax Guide | Copy Shortcuts |
| Security Audit Log | Serial [x] | FTP Guide | Profile Shortcuts |
| Set Date and Time | SMTP Setup | Print Defects GuideInformation GuideSupplies Guide |
Option Card Menu
A list of installed download emulators (DLEs) appears. ^2
^1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
^2 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.
Supplies menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Replace Supply Separator Pick Assembly and Roller | Provides the option to reset the supply counter for the separator pick assembly and rollerSelect Yes to reset the supply counter.Select No to exit. |
| Cyan CartridgeEarly WarningInvalidCritically LowMissingDefectiveOKUnsupported | Shows the status of the cyan toner cartridge |
| Magenta CartridgeEarly WarningInvalidCritically LowMissingDefectiveOKUnsupported | Shows the status of the magenta toner cartridge |
| Yellow CartridgeEarly WarningInvalidCritically LowMissingDefectiveOKUnsupported | Shows the status of the yellow toner cartridge |
| Black CartridgeEarly WarningInvalidCritically LowMissingDefectiveOKUnsupported | Shows the status of the black toner cartridge |
| Separator Pick Assembly and RollerOKReplace | Shows the status of the separator pick assembly and roller |
| Waste Toner BottleNear FullReplaceMissingOK | Shows the status of the waste toner bottle |
| FuserEarly WarningLowReplaceMissingOK | Shows the status of the fuser |
| Transfer ModuleEarly WarningLowReplaceMissingOK | Shows the status of the transfer module |
| Staple CartridgeEarly WarningLowReplaceMissingOK | Shows the status of the staple cartridge |
| Hole Punch BoxNear FullReplaceMissingOK | Shows the status of the hole punch box |
Paper menu
Default Source menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Default SourceTray [x]MP FeederManual PaperManual Envelope | Sets a default paper source for all print jobsNotes:Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.From the Paper menu, Configure MP feeder must be set to Cassette for MP feeder to appear as a menu setting.If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray. |
Paper Size/Type menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Tray [x] SizeLetterLegalExecutiveOficio (Mexico)FolioStatementUniversalA4A5JIS B5 | Specifies the paper size loaded in each trayNotes:Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.For trays with automatic size sensing, only the size detected by the hardware appears.If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size and Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray is empty, the print job uses the linked tray. |
| Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu. | |
| Tray [x] TypePlain PaperCard StockTransparencyRecycledGlossyHeavy GlossyLabelsVinyl LabelsBondLetterheadPreprintedColored PaperLight PaperHeavy PaperRough/Cotton PaperCustom Type [x] | Specifies the type of paper loaded in each trayNotes:Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting for all other trays.If available, a user-defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking. |
| MP Feeder SizeLetterLegalExecutiveOficio (Mexico)FolioStatementUniversal7 3/4 Envelope9 Envelope10 EnvelopeDL EnvelopeC5 EnvelopeB5 EnvelopeOther EnvelopeA4A5A6JIS B5 | Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feederNotes:Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting.From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for MP Feeder to appear as a menu item. |
| Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu. | |
| MP Feeder TypeCustom Type [x]Plain PaperCard StockTransparencyRecycledGlossyHeavy GlossyLabelsVinyl LabelsBondEnvelopeRough EnvelopeLetterheadPreprintedColored PaperLight PaperHeavy PaperRough/Cotton Paper | Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feederNotes:Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting.From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for MP Feeder to appear as a menu item. |
| Manual Paper SizeLetterLegalExecutiveOficio (Mexico)FolioStatementUniversalA4A5A6JIS B5 | Specifies the size of the paper being manually loadedNote:Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting. |
| Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu. | |
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
| Menu item Description | |
| Manual Paper TypePlain PaperCard StockTransparencyRecycledGlossyHeavy GlossyLabelsVinyl LabelsBondLetterheadPreprintedColored PaperLight PaperHeavy PaperRough/Cotton PaperCustom Type [x] | Specifies the type of paper being manually loadedNote: Plain Paper is the factory default setting. |
| Manual Envelope Size10 EnvelopedL EnvelopeC5 EnvelopeB5 EnvelopeOther Envelope7 3/4 Envelope9 Envelope | Specifies the size of the envelope being manually loadedNote: 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting. DL Envelope is the international factory default setting. |
| Manual Envelope TypeEnvelopeRough EnvelopeCustom Type [x] | Specifies the type of envelope being manually loadedNote: Envelope is the factory default setting. |
| Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu. | |
Configure MP menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Configure MPCassetteManualFirst | Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feederNotes:Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual feed print jobs.First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source. |
Substitute Size menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Substitute SizeAll ListedOffStatement/A5Letter/A4 | Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not availableNotes:All Listed is the factory default setting. All available size substitutions are allowed.Off indicates no size substitutions are allowed.Setting a size substitution lets a print job continue without a Change Paper message appearing. |
Paper Texture menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Plain TextureNormalRoughSmooth | Specifies the relative texture of the plain paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Card Stock TextureNormalRoughSmooth | Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loadedNotes:•Normal is the factory default setting.•Settings appear only if card stock is supported. |
| Transparency TextureNormalRoughSmooth | Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Recycled TextureNormalRoughSmooth | Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Glossy TextureNormalRoughSmooth | Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Heavy Glossy TextureNormalRoughSmooth | Specifies the relative texture of the glossy paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Labels TextureNormalRoughSmooth | Specifies the relative texture of the labels loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Vinyl Labels TextureNormalRoughSmooth | Specifies the relative texture of the vinyl labels loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Bond TextureRoughSmoothNormal | Specifies the relative texture of the bond paper loadedNote: Rough is the factory default setting. |
| Envelope TextureNormalRoughSmooth | Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Rough Envelope TextureRough | Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loadedNote: Rough is the factory default setting. |
| Letterhead TextureNormalRoughSmooth | Specifies the relative texture of the letterhead loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Preprinted TextureNormalRoughSmooth | Specifies the relative texture of the preprinted paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Colored TextureNormalRoughSmooth | Specifies the relative texture of the colored paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Light TextureNormalRoughSmooth | Specifies the relative texture of the paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Heavy TextureNormalRoughSmooth | Specifies the relative texture of the paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Rough/Cotton TextureRough | Specifies the relative texture of the cotton paper loadedNote: Rough is the factory default setting. |
| Custom [x] TextureNormalRoughSmooth | Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loadedNotes:Normal is the factory default setting.Settings appear only if the custom type is supported. |
Paper Weight menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Plain WeightNormalHeavyLight | Specifies the relative weight of the plain paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Card Stock WeightNormalHeavyLight | Specifies the relative weight of the card stock loadedNotes:Normal is the factory default setting.Settings appear only if card stock is supported. |
| Transparency WeightNormalHeavyLight | Specifies the relative weight of the transparencies loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Recycled WeightNormalHeavyLight | Specifies the relative weight of the recycled paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Glossy WeightNormalHeavyLight | Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Heavy Glossy WeightHeavy | Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loadedNote: Heavy is the factory default setting. |
| Labels WeightNormalHeavyLight | Specifies the relative weight of the labels loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Vinyl Labels WeightNormalHeavyLight | Specifies the relative weight of vinyl labels loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Bond WeightNormalHeavyLight | Specifies the relative weight of the bond paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Envelope WeightNormalHeavyLight | Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Rough Envelope WeightHeavyLightNormal | Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loadedNote: Heavy is the factory default setting. |
| Letterhead WeightNormalHeavyLight | Specifies the relative weight of the letterhead loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Preprinted WeightNormalHeavyLight | Specifies the relative weight of the preprinted paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Colored WeightNormalHeavyLight | Specifies the relative weight of the colored paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Light WeightLight | Specifies the relative weight of the paper loadedNote: Light is the factory default setting. |
| Heavy WeightHeavy | Specifies the relative weight of the paper loadedNote: Heavy is the factory default setting. |
| Rough/Cotton WeightNormalHeavyLight | Specifies the relative weight of the cotton paper loadedNote: Normal is the factory default setting. |
| Custom [x] WeightNormalHeavyLight | Specifies the relative weight of the custom paper loadedNotes:Normal is the factory default setting.Settings appear only if the custom type is supported. |
Paper Loading menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Card Stock LoadingOffDuplex | Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Card Stock as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Notes:Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from Print Properties.If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1-sided print jobs. | |
| Recycled LoadingOffDuplex | Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Recycled as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Glossy LoadingOffDuplex | Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Glossy as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Heavy Glossy LoadingOffDuplex | Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Heavy Glossy as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Labels LoadingOffDuplex | Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Labels as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Vinyl Labels LoadingOffDuplex | Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Vinyl Labels as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Bond LoadingOffDuplex | Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Bond as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Letterhead LoadingOffDuplex | Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Letterhead as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Preprinted LoadingOffDuplex | Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Preprinted as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Colored LoadingOffDuplex | Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Colored as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Light LoadingOffDuplex | Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Light as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Heavy LoadingOffDuplex | Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Heavy as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Rough/Cotton LoadingOffDuplex | Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Rough or Cotton as the paper typeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Notes: Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from Print Properties.If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1-sided print jobs. | |
| Custom [x] LoadingOffDuplex | Determines whether 2-sided printing occurs for all print jobs that specify Custom [x] as the paper typeNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Custom [x] Loading is available only if the custom paper type is supported. |
| Notes:Duplex sets the printer default to 2-sided printing for every print job unless 1-sided printing is selected from Print Properties.If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including 1-sided print jobs. | |
Custom Types menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Custom Type [x]PaperCard StockTransparencyGlossyRough/CottonLabelsVinyl LabelsEnvelope | Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom Type [x] name or a user-defined Custom Name created from the Embedded Web Server or from MarkVisionTM ProfessionalNotes:•Paper is the factory default setting.•The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source. |
| RecycledPaperCard StockTransparencyGlossyRough/CottonLabelsVinyl LabelsEnvelope | Specifies a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menusNotes:•Paper is the factory default setting.•The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source. |
Custom Names menu
| Menu item Definition | |
| Custom Name [x] [none] | Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces the Custom Type [x] name in the printer menus. |
Custom Bin Names menu
| Menu Item Description | |
| Standard Bin Specifies a custom name for the Standard Bin | |
| Bin [x] Specifies a custom name for Bin [x] |
Custom Scan Sizes menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Custom Scan Size [x]Scan Size NameWidth1–8.5 inches (25–215.9 mm)Height1–25 inches (25–635 mm)OrientationPortraitLandscape2 scans per sideOffOn | Specifies a custom scan size name, scan sizes and options. The custom scan size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.Notes:8.5 inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 210 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Width.14 inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 297 millimeters is the international factory default setting for Height.Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side. |
Universal Setup menu
These menu items are used to specify the height and width of the Universal paper size. The Universal paper size is a user-defined paper size setting. It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar options, such as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet.
| Menu item Description | |
| Units of MeasureInchesMillimeters | Identifies the unit of measureNote: Inches is the US factory default setting. Millimeters is the international factory default setting. |
| Portrait Width3–48 inches76–1219 mm | Sets the portrait widthNotes:If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum width allowed.8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. 216 mm is the international factory default setting.The width can be increased in 0.01-inch or in 1-mm increments. |
| Portrait Height3-48 inches76-1219 mm | Sets the portrait heightNotes:If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the maximum height allowed.14 inches is the US factory default setting. 356 mm is the international factory default setting.The height can be increased in 0.01-inch or in 1-mm increments. |
| Feed DirectionShort EdgeLong Edge | Specifies the feed directionNotes:Short Edge is the factory default setting.Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the maximum width supported in the tray. |
Bin Setup menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Output BinStandard BinBin [x] | Specifies the default exit binNote: Standard Bin is the factory default setting. |
| Configure BinsMailboxLinkMail OverflowLink OptionalType Assignment | Specifies configuration options for exit binsNotes:Mailbox is the factory default setting. This setting treats each bin as a separate mailbox.Link configures all available bins as one large exit bin.Mail Overflow assigns an overflow bin when the mailbox bins become full.Link Optional links together all available exit bins except the standard bin and only appears when at least two optional bins are installed.Type Assignment assigns each paper type to an exit bin or linked bin set.Bins assigned the same name are automatically linked unless Link Optional is selected. |
| Overflow BinStandard BinBin [x] | Specifies an alternate exit bin when a designated bin is fullNote: Standard Bin is the factory default setting. |
| Assign Type/BinPlain Paper BinCard Stock BinTransparency BinRecycled BinGlossy BinHeavy Glossy BinLabels BinVinyl Labels BinBond BinEnvelope BinRough Envelope BinLetterhead BinPreprinted BinColored BinLight Paper BinHeavy Paper BinRough/Cotton BinCustom [x] Bin | Selects an exit bin for each supported paper typeSelect from the following options for each type:DisabledStandard BinBin [x]Note: Disabled is the factory default setting. |
Reports menu
Reports menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Menu Settings Page | Prints a report containing information about the paper loaded into trays, installed memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, printer control panel language, TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other information |
| Device Statistics | Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details about printed pages |
| Network Setup Page | Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address informationNote: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers. |
| Network [x] Setup Page | Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address informationNotes:This menu item is available when there is more than one network option installed.This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected to print servers. |
| Shortcut List Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts | |
| Fax Job Log Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxesNote: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu. | |
| Fax Call Log | Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and blocked callsNote: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax Settings menu. |
| Copy Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts | |
| E-mail Shortcuts | Prints a report containing information about e-mail shortcuts |
| Fax Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts | |
| FTP Shortcuts Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts | |
| Profiles List Prints a list of profiles stored in the printer | |
| Print Fonts | Prints a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in the printer |
| Print Directory | Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or printer hard diskNotes:Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed correctly and working. |
| Asset Report | Prints a report containing asset information including the printer serial number and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned into an asset database. |
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Active NICAuto[list of available network cards] | Notes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed. |
Standard Network or Network [x] menus
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu; all inactive ports are omitted.
| Menu item Description | |
| PCL SmartSwitchOnOff | Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off. |
| PS SmartSwitchOnOff | Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off. |
| NPA ModeAutoOff | Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocolNotes:Auto is the factory default setting.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated. |
| Network BufferAuto3KB to [maximum size allowed] | Sets the size of the network input bufferNotes:Auto is the factory default setting.The value can be changed in 1-KB increments.The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated. |
| Job BufferingOffOnAuto | Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only appears if a formatted disk is installed.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated. |
| Mac Binary PSAutoOnOff | Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobsNotes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs. |
| Standard Network SetupReportsNetwork CardTCP/IPIPv6WirelessAppleTalk | Displays and sets the printer network settings.Note:The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network. |
| Network [x] SetupReportsNetwork CardTCP/IPIPv6WirelessAppleTalk |
Network Reports menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network Setup > Reports or Network Reports
| Menu item Description | |
| Print Setup Page | Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address |
Network Card menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > Network Card
| Menu item Description | |
| View Card StatusConnectedDisconnected | Lets you view the connection status of the network card |
| View Card Speed Lets you view the speed | of a currently active network card |
| View Network AddressUAA LAA | Lets you view the network addresses |
| End-of-Job Timeout0–255 | Sets the amount of time in seconds before a network print job is canceled.Notes:90 seconds is the factory default setting.A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10. |
| Banner PageOffOn | Allows the printer to print a banner page.Note: Off is the factory default setting. |
TCP/IP menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network models or printers attached to print servers.
| Menu item Description | |
| ActivateOnOff | Activates TCP/IPNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Set Hostname Lets you set the current TCP/IP hostnameNote: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server. | |
| IP Address Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP addressNote: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that support BOOTP and RARP. | |
| Netmask Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP netmask | |
| Gateway Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP gateway | |
| Enable DHCPOnOff | Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment settingNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Enable RARPOnOff | Specifies the RARP address assignment settingNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Enable BOOTPOnOff | Specifies the BOOTP address assignment settingNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Enable AutoIPYesNo | Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking settingNote: Yes is the factory default setting. |
| Enable FTP/TFTPYesNo | Enables the built-in FTP server, which allows you to send files to the printer using File Transfer Protocol.Note: Yes is the factory default setting. |
| Enable HTTP ServerYesNo | Enables the built-in web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a web browser.Note: Yes is the factory default setting. |
| WINS Server Address Lets you view or change the current WINS server address | |
| Enable DDNSYesNo | Lets you view or change the current DDNS settingNote: Yes is the factory default setting. |
| Enable mDNSYesNo | Lets you view or change the current mDNS settingNote: Yes is the factory default setting. |
| DNS Server Address Lets you view or change the current DNS server address | |
| Enable HTTPSYesNo | Lets you view or change the current HTTPS settingNote: Yes is the factory default setting. |
IPv6 menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.
| Menu item Description | |
| Enable IPv6OnOff | Enables IPv6 in the printerNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Auto ConfigurationOnOff | Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a routerNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Set Hostname Lets you set the hostname | Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server. |
| View Address | |
| View Router Address | |
| Enable DHCPv6OnOff | Enables DHCPv6 in the printerNote: On is the factory default setting. |
Wireless menu
Use the following menu items to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings.
Note: This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network.
The Wireless menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > Wireless
| Menu item Description | |
| WPS PBC ModeLets you connect the printer to a | wireless network by pressing buttons on both the printer and the access point (wireless router) within a given period of time |
| WPS PIN ModeLets you connect the printer to a | wireless network by using a PIN on the printer and entering it into the wireless settings of the access point |
| WPS Auto DetectDisableEnable | Automatically detects the connection method that an access point with WPS uses—WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) or WPS Personal Identification Number (PIN)Note: Disable is the factory default setting. |
| Network ModeAd hocInfrastructure | Specifies the network modeNotes:•Ad hoc is the factory default setting. This configures wireless connection directly between the printer and a computer.•Infrastructure lets the printer access a network using an access point. |
| Compatibility802.11b/g/n802.11n802.11b/g | Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless networkNote: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting. |
| Choose Network[list of available networks] | Lets you select an available network for the printer to use |
| View Signal QualityLets you view the quality of | the wireless connection |
| View Security ModeLets you view the encryption | method that a wireless network uses |
Note: Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a simple and secure configuration that allows you to establish a wireless network and enable network security without requiring prior knowledge of Wi-Fi technology. It is no longer necessary to configure the network name (SSID) and WEP key or WPA passphrase for network devices.
AppleTalk menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
| Menu item Description | |
| ActivateYesNo | Activates AppleTalk supportNote: Yes is the factory default setting. |
| View Name Shows the assigned AppleTalk | nameNote: The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server. |
| View Address Shows the assigned AppleTalk | talk addressNote: The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server. |
| Set Zone [default][list of zones available on the network] | Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the networkNote: When “default” is selected, the printer uses the AppleTalk zone that the router identifies as the default zone for the network. If no default zone exists, then the zone marked with an * is the default setting. |
Standard USB menu
| Menu item Description | |
| PCL SmartSwitchOnOff | Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to Off. |
| PS SmartSwitchOnOff | Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off. |
| NPA ModeAutoOnOff | Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocolNotes:Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data, determine the format, and then process it appropriately.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated. |
| USB BufferAuto3KB to [maximum size allowed]Disabled | Sets the size of the USB input bufferNotes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.•The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-KB increments.•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.•To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated. |
| Job BufferingOffOnAuto | Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printingNotes:•Off is the factory default setting.•On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated. |
| Mac Binary PSAutoOnOff | Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobsNotes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol. |
| ENA AddressYYY.YYY.YYY.YYY.YYY | Sets the network address information for an external print serverNote:This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port. |
| ENA NetmaskYYY.YYY.YYY.YYY.YYY | Sets the netmask information for an external print serverNote:This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port. |
| ENA GatewayYYY.YYY.YYY.YYY.YYY | Sets the gateway information for an external print serverNote:This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port. |
Parallel [x] menu
| Menu item Description | |
| PCL SmartSwitchOnOff | Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off. |
| PS SmartSwitchOnOff | Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off. |
| NPA ModeAutoOnOff | Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocolNotes:Auto is the factory default setting.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated. |
| Parallel BufferAuto3KB to [maximum size allowed]Disabled | Sets the size of the parallel input bufferNotes:Auto is the factory default setting.Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1-KB increments.The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated. |
| Job BufferingOffOnAuto | Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printingNotes:Off is the factory default setting.On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated. |
| Advanced StatusOnOff | Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel portNotes:On is the factory default setting.Off disables parallel port negotiation. |
| ProtocolFastbytesStandard | Specifies the parallel port protocolNotes:Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems. |
| Honor InitOffOn | Determines if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the computerNotes:Off is the factory default setting.The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the computer is turned on. |
| Parallel Mode 2OnOff | Determines if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a strobeNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Mac Binary PSAutoOnOff | Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobsNotes:Auto is the factory default setting.Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs. |
| ENA AddressYYY.YYY.YYY.YYY | Sets the network address information for an external print serverNote: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port. |
| ENA NetmaskYYY.YYY.YYY.YYY | Sets the netmask information for an external print serverNote: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port. |
| ENA gatewayYYY.YYY.YYY.YYY | Sets the gateway information for an external print serverNote: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print server through the USB port. |
Serial [x] menu
| Menu item Description | |
| PCL SmartSwitchOnOff | Sets the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off. |
| PS SmartSwitchOnOff | Sets the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer languageNotes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off. |
| NPA ModeAutoOnOff | Sets the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocolNotes:Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data, determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA format, it is rejected as bad data.When set to Off, the printer does not perform NPA processing.Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated. |
| Serial BufferAuto3KB to [maximum size allowed]Disabled | Sets the size of the serial input bufferNotes:•Auto is the factory default setting.•Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are printed before normal processing is resumed.•The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1-KB increments.•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or Off.•To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated. |
| Job BufferingOffOnAuto | Temporarily stores print jobs on the printer hard disk before printingNotes:•Off is the factory default setting. The printer does not buffer print jobs on the printer hard disk.•On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.•Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another input port.•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated. |
| ProtocolDTRDTR/DSRXON/XOFFXON/XOFF/DTRXONXOFF/DTRDSR | Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial portNotes:•DTR is the factory default setting.•DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.•XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.•XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and software handshaking settings. |
| Robust XONOffOn | Determines whether the printer communicates availability to the computerNotes:•Off is the factory default setting.•This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to XON/XOFF. |
| Baud9600192003840057600115200138200172800230400345600120024004800 | Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial portNotes:9600 is the factory default setting.138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1, Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus. |
| Data Bits87 | Specifies the number of data bits sent in each transmission frameNote: 8 is the factory default setting. |
| ParityNoneIgnoreEvenOdd | Sets the parity for serial input and output data framesNote: None is the factory default setting. |
| Honor DSROffOn | Determines whether the printer uses the DSR SignalNotes:Off is the factory default setting.DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing. |
SMTP Setup menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server gateway and port information | |
| Primary SMTP Gateway Port | Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port. |
| Secondary SMTP Gateway | |
| Secondary SMTP Gateway Port | |
| SMTP Timeout5–30 | Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to send an e-mailNote: 30 seconds is the factory default setting. |
| Reply Address | Specifies a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the printer |
| Use SSLDisabledNegotiateRequired | Sets the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the SMTP serverNotes:Disabled is the factory default setting.When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if SSL will be used. |
| SMTP Server AuthenticationNo authentication requiredLogin/PlainCRAM-MD5Digest-MD5NTLMKerberos 5 | Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e-mail privilegesNote: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting. |
| Device-Initiated E-mailNoneUse Device SMTP Credentials | Specifies what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.Notes:None is the factory default setting for Device and User-Initiated E-mail.Device UserID and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected. |
| User-Initiated E-mailNoneUse Device SMTP CredentialsUse Session User ID & PasswordUse Session E-mail address & PasswordPrompt User | |
| Device UserID | |
| Device Password | |
| Kerberos 5 Realm | |
| NTLM Domain | |
Security menu
Editing Security Setups menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Edit Backup Password Creates a backup passwordNote: This menu item will only appear if a backup password exists. | |
| Edit Building Blocks | Edits the Internal Accounts, NTLM, various Setups, Password, and PIN |
| Edit Security Templates Adds or edits | a Security Template |
| Edit Access Controls | Controls access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access points |
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Login RestrictionsLogin failuresFailure time frameLockout timePanel Login TimeoutRemote Login Timeout | Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control panel before all users are locked outNotes:“Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–10 attempts is the factory default setting.“Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.“Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the login failures limit. Settings range from 1–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting. 1 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.“Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the Home screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–900 seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.“Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–120 seconds. 10 minutes is the factory default setting. |
| Security Reset JumperAccess controls=“No Security”No EffectReset factory security defaults | Changes the value of the security settingsNotes:Access controls=“No Security” retains all the security information that the user has defined. “No Security” is the factory default setting“No Effect” means the reset has no effect on the device’s security configuration.“Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user has defined, and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the panel and the Web page. |
| LDAP Certificate VerificationDemandTryAllowNever | Allows the user to request a server certificateNotes:“Demand” means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided, the session is terminated immediately. “Demand” is the factory default setting.“Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, the session is terminated immediately.“Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally.“Never” means no server certificate is requested. |
| Minimum PIN Length1–16 | Limits the digit length of the PIN.Note:4 is the is the factory default setting. |
Confidential Print menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Max Invalid PINOff2–10 | Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be enteredNotes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.Once the limit is reached, the print job for that user name and that PIN are deleted. |
| Job ExpirationOff1 hour4 hours24 hours1 week | Limits the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deletedNotes:Off is the factory default setting.If the Job Expiration setting is changed while confidential print jobs reside on the printer RAM or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print jobs does not change to the new default value.If the printer is turned off, all confidential jobs held in printer RAM are deleted. |
Disk Wiping menu
Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
| Menu item Description | |
| Wiping ModeAutoManualOff | Specifies the mode for disk wipingNote: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer determines when to initiate a disk wipe. |
| Scheduled WipingTimeDay | Sets the schedule for disk wipingNotes:Time is used to set the time for scheduled wiping.Day is used to set the specific day or period for scheduled wiping. Values are Sunday to Friday, Everyday, Weekdays, and Weekends.Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or confirmation message.Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without first having to wipe it. |
| Manual WipingDo not start nowStart now | Overwrites all disk space that has been used to hold data from a print job that has been processed (printed). This type of wipe does not erase any information related to an unprocessed print job.Notes:“Do not start now “is the factory default setting.If the Disk Wiping access control is activated, then a user must successfully authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk wipe. |
| Automatic MethodSingle passMultiple pass | Marks all disk space used by a previous print job and does not permit the file system to reuse this space until it has been clearedNotes:“Single pass” is the factory default setting.Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to turn the printer off for an extended amount of time.Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass method. |
| Manual MethodSingle passMultiple pass | Allows the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it firstNotes:“Single pass” is the factory default setting.Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass method only. |
| Scheduled MethodSingle passMultiple pass | Allows the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it firstNote: “Single pass” is the factory default setting. |
Security Audit Log menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Export Log Enables an authorized user | to export the security logNotes:To export the log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must be attached to the printer.From the Embedded Web Server, the log can be downloaded to a computer. |
| Delete LogYesNo | Specifies whether audit logs are deletedNote: Yes is the factory default setting. |
| Configure LogEnable AuditEnable Remote SyslogRemote Syslog ServerRemote Syslog PortRemote Syslog MethodRemote Syslog FacilityLog full behaviorAdmin's e-mail addressDigitally sign exportsSeverity of events to logRemote Syslog non-logged eventsE-mail log cleared alertE-mail log wrapped alertE-mail % full alert% full alert levelE-mail log exported alertE-mail log settings changed alertLog line endings | Specifies whether and how the audit logs are createdNote: Factory default settings enable the security audit log. |
Set Date and Time menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Current Date and Time | Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer |
| Manually Set Date and Time Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format. | |
| Time Zone Note: GMT is the factory default setting. | |
| Automatically Observe DSTOnOff | Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time associated with the Time Zone setting. |
| Custom Time Zone SetupDST Start WeekDST Start DayOffDST Start MonthDST Start TimeDST End WeekDST End DayDST End MonthDST End TimeDST Offset | Enables the user to set up the time zone |
| Enable NTPOnOff | Enables Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a networkNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| NTP Server Lets you view the NTP Server Address | |
| Enable AuthenticationOffOn | Lets you change the authentication setting to on or offNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
Settings menu
General Settings menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Display LanguageEnglishFrancaisDeutschItalianoEspanolGreekDanskNorskNederlandsSvenskaPortugueseSuomiRussianPolskiMagyarTurkceCeskySimplified ChineseTraditional ChineseKoreanJapanese | Sets the language of the text appearing on the displayNote: All languages may not be available for all printers. |
| Eco-ModeOffEnergyEnergy/PaperPaper | Minimizes the use of energy, paper, or specialty mediaNotes:Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to its factory default settings.Energy minimizes the power used by the printer.Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and specialty media.Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but print quality is not. |
| ADF Loaded BeepEnabledDisabled | Specifies whether the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loadedNote: Enabled is the factory default setting. |
| Quiet ModeOffOn | Reduces the amount of noise produced by the printerNotes:Off is the factory default setting. This setting supports the performance specifications for your printer.On configures the printer to produce as little noise as possible. This setting is best suited for printing text and line graphics.For optimal printing of color-rich documents, set Quiet Mode to Off.Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full speed printing. |
| Run Initial setupYesNo | Instructs the printer to run the setup wizardNotes:Yes is the factory default setting.After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the Country select screen, the default becomes No. |
| Keyboard Keyboard Type English Francais Francais Canadien Deutsch Italiano Espanol Greek Dansk Norsk Nederlands Svenska Suomi Portuguese Russian Polski Swiss German Swiss French Korean Magyar Turkish Czech Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Japanese Custom Key [x] | Specifies a language and custom key information for the printer control panel keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and symbols from the printer control panel keyboard. |
| Paper Sizes US Metric | Notes:US is the factory default setting.Initial setting is determined by your country or region selection in the initial setup wizard.Changing this setting also changes the default for each input source in the Paper Size/Paper Type menu. |
| Scan to PC Port Range [port range] | Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers separated by a semicolon.Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting. |
| Displayed InformationLeft sideRight sideCustom Text [x][x] TonerFuserTransfer Module | Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the home screenFor the Left side and Right side menus, select from the following options:NoneIP AddressHostnameContact NameLocationDate/TimemDNS/DDNS Service NameZero Configuration NameCustom Text [x]Model NameFor the [x] Toner, [x] Fuser, and Transfer Module menus, select from the following options:When to displayDo not displayDisplayMessage to DisplayDefaultAlternateDefault[text entry]Alternate[text entry]Notes:IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.“Do not display” is the factory default setting for “When to display.”Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display. |
| Displayed InformationWaste Toner BottlePaper JamLoad PaperService Errors | Lets you customize the displayed information for Waste Toner Bottle, Paper Jam, Load Paper, and Service ErrorsSelect from the following options:DisplayNoYesMessage to DisplayDefaultAlternateDefault[text entry]Alternate[text entry]Notes:No is the factory default setting for Display.Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display. |
| Home screen customizationChange LanguageCopyCopy shortcutsFaxFax ShortcutsE-mailE-mail ShortcutsFTPFTP ShortcutsSearch Held JobsHeld JobsUSB DriveProfiles and SolutionsBookmarksJobs by userForms and Favorites | Lets you add or remove icons and buttons that appear on the home screenAvailable options:Do not displayDisplay |
| Date FormatMM-DD-YYYYDD-MM-YYYYYYYY-MM-DD | Specifies the format for the printer date |
| Time Format12 hour A.M./P.M.24 hour clock | Specifies the format for the printer time |
| Screen Brightness20–100 | Specifies the brightness of the printer control panel screen |
| One Page CopyOffOn | Sets the copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a timeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Output LightingNormal/Standby ModeOffDimBrightSleep ModeOffDimBright | Sets the amount of light from the standard binNotes:Dim is the factory default setting for Normal/Standby Mode if Eco-Mode is set to Energy or Energy/Paper.Bright is the factory default setting for Normal/Standby Mode if Eco-Mode is set to Off or Paper.Off is the factory default setting for Sleep Mode if Eco-Mode is set to Energy or Energy/Paper.Dim is the factory default setting for Sleep Mode if Eco-Mode is set to Off or Paper. |
| Error LightingOnOff | Determines if indicator lights blink when the printer encounters errors.Note: On is the factory default setting. |
| Audio FeedbackButton FeedbackOnOffVolume1–10 | Notes:On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.5 is the factory default setting for Volume. |
| Tactile Touchscreen FeedbackOnOff | Specifies whether the printer control panel provides touch sensation feedback |
| Show BookmarksYesNo | Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs areaNote: Yes is the factory default setting. When Yes is selected, bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area. |
| Allow Background RemovalOnOff | Specifies whether image background removal is allowed during copy, fax, e-mail, FTP, or scan-to-USB jobsNote: On is the factory default setting. The background of the image will be removed. |
| Allow Custom Job ScansOnOff | Lets you scan multiple documents into one fileNote: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then the Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs. |
| Scanner Jam RecoveryJob levelPage level | Specifies how a scan job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs in the ADFNotes:If Job level is selected, then the entire job must be rescanned if any pages jam.If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed page forward. |
| Web Page Refresh Rate30–300 | Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server refreshesNote:120 seconds is the factory default setting. |
| Contact Name Specifies a contact name for the printer | Note:The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web Server. |
| Location Specifies the location of the printer | Note:The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server. |
| AlarmsAlarm ControlCartridge AlarmStaple AlarmHole Punch Alarm | Sets an alarm to sound when the printer requires user interventionAvailable options for each alarm type are:OffSingleContinuousNotes:•Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control and Cartridge Alarm. Single sounds three quick beeps.•Off is the factory default setting for Staple Alarm and Hole Punch Alarm. Off means no alarm will sound.•Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds. |
| TimeoutsStandby ModeDisabled1–240 | Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system enters a lower power stateNote:15 is the factory default setting. |
| TimeoutsSleep Mode1–240 minDisabled | Sets the amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it goes into a reduced power stateNotes:•30 min is the factory default setting.•Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to Off.•Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require longer warm-up times.•Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm-up time. |
| TimeoutsScreen Timeout15–300 sec | Sets the amount of time (in seconds) the printer waits before returning to a Ready stateNote:30 sec is the factory default setting. |
| TimeoutsPrint TimeoutDisabled1-255 sec | Sets the amount of time (in seconds) the printer waits to receive an end-of-job message before canceling the remainder of the print jobNotes:90 sec is the factory default setting.When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any new print jobs are waiting.Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation. This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs. |
| TimeoutsWait Timeout15–65535 secDisabled | Sets the amount of time (in seconds) the printer waits for additional data before canceling a print jobNotes:40 sec is the factory default setting.Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL emulation print jobs. |
| TimeoutsJob Hold Timeout5–255 sec | Sets the amount of time (in seconds) the printer waits for user intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and continues to print other jobs in the print queueNotes:30 sec is the factory default setting.This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed. |
| Print RecoveryAuto ContinueDisabled5–255 | Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline situations when not resolved within the specified time periodNote: Disabled is the factory default setting. |
| Print RecoveryJam RecoveryAutoOnOff | Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pagesNotes:Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks.On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages. |
| Print RecoveryPage ProtectOffOn | Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwiseNotes:Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the entire page prints. |
| Press Sleep ButtonSleepHibernateDo nothing | Determines how the printer, while in Idle state, reacts to a short press of the Sleep buttonNotes:Sleep is the factory default setting.Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration.If the printer is in Sleep Mode, then the touch screen appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color.Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode.If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the touch screen is completely off and the Sleep button turns amber in color and is blinking. |
| Press and Hold Sleep ButtonDo nothingSleepHibernate | Determines how the printer, while in Idle state, reacts to a long press of the Sleep buttonNotes:Do Nothing is the factory default setting.Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower power configuration.If the printer is in Sleep Mode, then the touch screen appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color.Press and hold the Sleep button for 3 seconds or longer to enter Hibernate mode.Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode. |
| Factory DefaultsDo Not RestoreRestore Now | Returns the printer settings to the factory default settingsNotes:Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not Restore keeps the user-defined settings.Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected. |
Copy Settings menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Content TypeText/PhotoTextGraphicsPhoto | Specifies the type of content contained in the copy jobNotes:•Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.•Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.• Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.• Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image. |
| Content SourceColor LaserInkjetMagazinePressBlack/White LaserPhoto/FilmNewspaperOther | Specifies the source of content in the copy jobNotes:• Color Laser is the factory default setting. Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.• Black/White Laser is used when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.• Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer.• Photo/Film is used when the original document is a photo from film• Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine.• Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper.• Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press.• Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer. |
| ColorOnOff | Specifies whether or not copies are printed in colorNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Allow color copiesOnOff | Lets you enable or disable color in copyingNotes:• On is the factory default setting.• Setting this to Off will hide all color-specific menus.• This setting overrides the Color setting. |
| Sides (Duplex)1 sided to 1 sided1 sided to 2 sided2 sided to 1 sided2 sided to 2 sided | Specifies whether an original document is duplex (two-sided) or simplex (one-sided), and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplexNotes:1 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on one side and the copied page will also have printing on one side.1 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on one side while the copied page will have printing on both sides. For example, if the original document is six sheets, the copy is three sheets with printing on both sides.2 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on both sides while the copied page will have printing on only one side. For example, if the original document is three sheets with an image on each side of each sheet, then the copy is six sheets with only one image on one side of each sheet.2 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on both sides and the copy mimics the original exactly. |
| Paper SaverOff2 on 1 Portrait2 on 1 Landscape4 on 1 Portrait4 on 1 Landscape | Allows copying two or four sheets of a document on one pageNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Print Page BordersOffOn | Specifies whether or not a border is printed around the edge of the pageNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| CollateOn [1,2,1,2,1,2]Off [1,1,1,2,2,2] | Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copiesNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| PunchOff2 holes3 holes4 holes | Determines the type of hole punch finishing to be used in a print or copy jobNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| StapleOffOn | Lets you enable or disable the staple finisherNotes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu only appears when a staple finisher is installed. |
| Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementUniversal4 x 6 in.3 x 5 in.Business CardID CardCustom Scan Size [x]A4A5Oficio (Mexico)JIS B4JIS B5Book OriginalAuto Size SenseMixed Sizes | Specifies the paper size of the original documentNotes:Letter is the US factory default setting.A4 is the international factory default setting. |
| Copy To SourceTray [x]Auto Size MatchManual Feeder | Specifies the paper source for copy jobsNote: Tray 1 is the factory default setting. |
| Transparency SeparatorsOnOff | Places a sheet of paper between transparenciesNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Separator SheetsNoneBetween CopiesBetween JobsBetween Pages | Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobsNote: None is the factory default setting. |
| Separator Sheet SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder | Specifies the separator sheet sourceNote: Tray 1 is the factory default setting. |
| Darkness1-9 | Specifies the level of darkness for the copy jobNote: 5 is the factory default setting. |
| Output BinStandard BinBin [x] | Specifies the exit bin to be used for the copy jobNotes:Standard Bin is the factory default setting.Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed. |
| Number of Copies1-999 | Specifies the number of copies for the copy jobNote: 1 is the factory default setting. |
| Header/FooterTop leftTop leftOffDate/TimePage numberCustom textPrint onAll pagesFirst page onlyAll but first pageCustom text | Specifies header/footer information for the top left of the pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting for Top left.All pages is the factory default setting for Print on. |
| Header/FooterTop middleTop middleOffDate/TimePage numberBates numberCustom textPrint onAll pagesFirst page onlyAll but first pageCustom text | Specifies header/footer information for the middle of the pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting for Top middle.All pages is the factory default setting for Print on. |
| Header/FooterTop rightTop rightOffDate/TimePage numberBates numberCustom textPrint onAll pagesFirst page onlyAll but first pageCustom text | Specifies header/footer information for the top right of the pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting for Top right.All pages is the factory default setting for Print on. |
| Header/FooterBottom leftBottom leftOffDate/TimePage numberBates numberCustom textPrint onAll pagesFirst page onlyAll but first pageCustom text | Specifies header/footer information for the bottom left of the pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting for Bottom left.All pages is the factory default setting for Print on. |
| Header/FooterBottom middleBottom middleOffDate/TimePage numberBates numberCustom textPrint onAll pagesFirst page onlyAll but first pageCustom text | Specifies header/footer information for the bottom middle of the pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting for Bottom middle.All pages is the factory default setting for Print on. |
| Header/FooterBottom rightBottom rightOffDate/TimePage numberBates numberCustom textPrint onAll pagesFirst page onlyAll but first pageCustom text | Specifies header/footer information for the bottom right of the pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting for Bottom right.All pages is the factory default setting for Print on. |
| OverlayOffConfidentialCopyDraftUrgentCustom | Specifies the overlay text printed on each page of the copy jobNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Custom Overlay Specifies the custom overlay textNote: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed. | |
| Allow priority copiesOnOff | Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or documentNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Custom Job scanningOffOn | Lets you copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizesNotes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only if a valid printer hard drive is installed. |
| Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff | Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcutsNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Background Removal-4 to 4 | Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copyNote: 0 is the factory default setting. |
| Auto CenterOffOn | Lets you automatically center the content on the pageNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Color BalanceCyan - RedMagenta - GreenYellow - Blue | Enables an equal balance of colors in the output |
| Color DropoutColor DropoutNoneRedGreenBlueDefault Red Threshold0-255Default Green Threshold0-255Default Blue Threshold0-255 | Specifies which color to drop during copies, and how much to increase or decrease the dropoutNotes:None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold. |
| ContrastBest for content0-5 | Specifies the contrast used for the copy jobNote: Best for content is the factory default setting. |
| Mirror ImageOffOn | Creates a mirror image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Negative ImageOffOn | Creates a negative image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Shadow Detail-4 to 4 | Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copyNote: 0 is the factory default setting. |
| ADF Skew FixOffOn | Lets you fix slight skew on the scanned imageNote: Off is the factory default setting |
| Scan edge to edgeOffOn | Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edgeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Sharpness1-5 | Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a copyNote: 3 is the factory default setting. |
| Temperature-4 to 4 | Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool" values generate a bluer output than the default, while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default. |
| Sample CopyOffOn | Creates a sample copy of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line.
General Fax Settings
| Menu item Description | |
| Fax Name or Station Name Specifies the name of the fax in the printer | |
| Fax Number or Station Number Specifies a number associated with the fax | |
| Station IDFax Name or Station NameFax Number or Station Number | Specifies how the fax is identified |
| Enable Manual FaxOffOn | Sets the printer to fax manually only, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handsetNotes:Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax number.Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function. |
| Memory UseEqualMostly sentAll sendAll receiveMostly receive | Defines the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobsNotes:Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.Mostly sent specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.All send specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.All receive specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.Mostly receive specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs. |
| Cancel FaxesAllowDon't Allow | Specifies whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs |
| Caller IDOnOffAlternate | Specifies type of caller ID being used |
| Fax number maskingOffFrom leftFrom right | Specifies the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax numberNote:The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask” setting. |
| Digits to mask0-58 | Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number |
| Fax Cover Page | Configures the fax cover pageNote: “Off by default” is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options. |
| Fax Cover Page | |
| Off by default | |
| On by default | |
| Never use | |
| Always use | |
| Include to field | |
| On | |
| Off | |
| Include from field | |
| Off | |
| On | |
| From | |
| Include Message field | |
| Off | |
| On | |
| Message | |
| Include Logo | |
| Off | |
| On | |
| Include Footer [x] | |
| Footer [x] | |
Fax Send Settings
| Menu item Description | |
| ResolutionStandardFine 200 dpiSuper Fine 300 dpiUltra Fine 600 dpi | Specifies quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives greater print quality, but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.Note: Standard is the factory default setting. |
| Original SizeMixed SizesLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementUniversal4 x 6 in.3 x 5 in.Business CardCustom Scan Size [x]A4A5Oficio (Mexico)A6JIS B4JIS B5Book OriginalAuto Size Sense | Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scannedNote: Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting. |
| Sides (Duplex)OffLong edgeShort edge | Specifies how text and graphics are oriented on a pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape ).Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape). |
| Content TypeTextText/PhotoGraphicsPhoto | Specifies the type of content that will be scanned for faxingNotes:Text is the factory default setting. Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.Text/Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image. |
| Content SourceColor LaserInkjetMagazinePressBlack/White LaserPhoto/FilmNewspaperOther | Specifies how the output is producedNotes:•Color Laser is the factory default setting. Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.•Black/White is used when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.•Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer.•Photo/Film is used when the original document is a photo from film•Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine.•Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper.•Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press.•Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer. |
| Darkness1-9 | Lightens or darkens the outputNote: 5 is the factory default setting. |
| Dial Prefix | Lets you enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided. |
| Dialing Prefix RulesPrefix Rule [x] | Establishes a dialing prefix rule |
| Automatic Redial0-9 | Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified numberNote: 5 is the factory default setting. |
| Redial Frequency1-200 | Specifies the number of minutes between redials |
| Behind a PABXNoYes | Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone |
| Enable ECMYesNo | Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs |
| Enable Fax ScansOnOff | Lets you fax files that are scanned at the computer |
| Driver to faxYesNo | Allows the driver to fax jobs to be sent by the printer |
| Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff | Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer |
| Dial ModeTonePulse | Specifies the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse |
| Max Speed2400480096001440033600 | Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent |
| Custom Job scanningOffOn | Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file |
| Scan PreviewOffOn | Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs |
| Background Removal-4 to 4 | Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copyNote: 0 is the factory default setting. |
| Color BalanceCyan - RedMagenta - GreenYellow - Blue | Enables an equal balance of colors in the output |
| Color DropoutColor DropoutNoneRedGreenBlueDefault Red Threshold0-255Default Green Threshold0-255Default Blue Threshold0-255 | Specifies which color to drop during faxing, and how much to increase or decrease the dropoutNotes:None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold. |
| ContrastBest for content0-5 | Specifies the contrast of the outputNote: “Best for content” is the factory default setting. |
| Mirror ImageOffOn | Creates a mirror image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Negative ImageOffOn | Creates a negative image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Shadow Detail-4 to 4 | Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a faxNote: 0 is the factory default setting. |
| ADF Skew FixOffOn | Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned imageNote: Off is the factory default setting |
| Scan edge to edgeOffOn | Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge prior to faxingNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Sharpness0-5 | Adjusts the sharpness of a faxNote: 3 is the factory default setting. |
| Temperature-4 to 4 | Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool" values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default. |
| Enable Color Fax ScansOff by defaultOn by defaultNever useAlways use | Enables color faxingNote: “Off by default” is the factory default setting. |
| Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono FaxesOnOff | Converts all outgoing faxes to black and whiteNote: On is the factory default setting. |
Fax Receive Settings
| Menu item Description | |
| Enable Fax ReceiveOnOff | Allows fax jobs to be received by the printerNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Rings to Answer1–25 | Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax jobNote: 1 is the factory default setting. |
| Auto ReductionOnOff | Scales an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated fax sourceNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Paper SourceAutoTray [x]Multi-Purpose Feeder | Specifies the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an incoming fax |
| Output BinStandard BinBin 1[x] | Specifies an output bin for received faxesNote: Bin 1 is available only when the finisher is installed. |
| Sides (Duplex)OffOn | Enables duplex printing (two-sided printing) for incoming fax jobs |
| Separator SheetsNoneBefore JobAfter Job | Enables the printer to include separator sheets in the output |
| Separator Sheet SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder | Specifies where the printer will pick the separator sheet |
| Fax FooterOffOn | Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received faxNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Max Speed3360024004800960014400 | Specifies the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received |
| Fax ForwardingPrintPrint and ForwardForward | Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient |
| Forward toFaxE-mailFTPLDSSeSF | Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwardedNote: This item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server. |
| Forward to Shortcut | Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF) |
| Block No Name FaxOffOn | Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified |
| Banned Fax List Enables the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer | |
| Holding FaxesHeld Fax ModeOffAlways OnManualScheduledFax Holding Schedule | Enables fax holding all of the time or according to a set scheduleNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Enable Color Fax ReceiveOnOff | Enables the device to receive fax in color |
Fax Log Settings
| Menu item Description | |
| Transmission LogPrint logDo not print logPrint only for error | Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job |
| Receive Error LogPrint NeverPrint on Error | Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error |
| Auto Print LogsOnOff | Enables automatic printing of fax logsNote: Logs print after every 200 jobs. |
| Log Paper SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder | Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs |
| Logs DisplayRemote Fax Name or RemoteStation NameDialed Number | Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned |
| Enable Job LogOnOff | Enables access to the Fax Job log |
| Enable Call LogOnOff | Enables access to the Fax Call log |
| Log Output BinStandard BinBin [x] | Specifies the output bin where fax logs are printed |
Speaker Settings
| Menu item Description | |
| Speaker ModeOn until ConnectedAlways OnAlways Off | Specifies the mode of the speaker.Notes:“On until Connected” is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the fax connection is made.Always On turns the speaker on.Always Off turns the speaker off. |
| Speaker VolumeHighLow | Controls the volume settingNote: High is the factory default setting. |
| Ringer VolumeOnOff | Controls the fax speaker ringer volumeNote: On is the factory default setting. |
Answer On
| Menu item Description | |
| All RingsSingle Ring OnlyDouble Ring OnlyTriple Ring OnlySingle or Double Rings OnlySingle or Triple Rings OnlyDouble or Triple Rings Only | Specifies ring patterns when device is answering callsNote: All Rings is the factory default setting. |
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.
Fax Server Setup
| Menu item Description | |
| To Format | Lets you enter the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer touch screen |
| Reply Address | |
| Subject | |
| Message | |
| SMTP Setup Specifies SMTP setup information | |
| Primary SMTP Gateway Specifies SMTP server port information | |
| Secondary SMTP Gateway | |
| Image FormatPDF (.pdf)XPS (.xps)TIFF (.tif) | Specifies the image type for scan to fax |
| Content TypeTextText/PhotoGraphicsPhoto | Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to faxNotes:Text is the factory default setting. Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.Text/Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image. |
| Content SourceColor LaserInkjetPhoto/FilmMagazineNewspaperPressOther | Specifies how content will be producedNotes:Color Laser is the factory default setting. Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.Black/White is used when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer.Photo/Film is used when the original document is a photo from filmMagazine is used when the original document is from a magazine.Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper.Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press.Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer. |
| Fax ResolutionStandardFine 200 dpiSuper Fine 300 dpiUltra Fine 600 dpi | Specifies the resolution level for scan to fax |
| Darkness1-9 | Lightens or darkens the outputNote:5 factory default setting. |
| OrientationPortraitLandscape | Specifies the orientation of the scanned image |
| Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementUniversal4 x 6 in.3 x 5 in.Business CardCustom Scan Size [x]A4A5Oficio (Mexico)JIS B4JIS B5Book OriginalAuto Size SenseMixed Sizes | Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scannedNote:Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting. |
| Use Multi-Page TIFFOnOff | Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.Notes:•On is the factory default setting.•This menu item applies to all scan functions. |
| Enable Analog ReceiveOffOn | Enables analog fax receiveNote:Off is the factory default setting. |
E-mail Settings menu
| Menu item Description | |
| E-mail Server SetupSubjectMessageBase file name | Specifies e-mail server informationNotes:The subject box has a limitation of 255 characters.The message box has a limitation of 512 characters. |
| E-mail Server SetupSend me a copyNever appearsOn by defaultOff by defaultAlways On | Sends a copy of the e-mail back to the senderNote: “Never appears” is the factory default setting. |
| E-mail Server SetupMax E-mail size0-65535 KB | Specifies the maximum e-mail size in kilobytesNote: E-mails above the specified size are not sent. |
| E-mail Server SetupSize error message | Sends a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit |
| E-mail Server SetupLimit destinations | Specifies a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limits e-mail destinations to that domain name onlyNotes:•E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.•The limit is one domain. |
| E-mail Server SetupWeb Link SetupServerLoginPasswordPathBase file nameWeb Link | Defines the e-mail server path name; for example: /directory/pathNote: The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name. |
| FormatPDF (.pdf)Secure PDFTIFF (.tif)JPEG (.jpg)XPS (.xps) | Specifies the format of the scanned fileNote: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting. |
| PDF Version1.51.6A-1a1.21.31.4 | Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e-mailingNote: 1.5 is the factory default setting. |
| Content TypeText/PhotoPhotoTextGraphics | Specifies the type of content that will be scanned for e-mailingNotes:•Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.•Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.• Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.• Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image. |
| Content SourceColor LaserInkjetMagazinePressBlack/White LaserPhoto/FilmNewspaperOther | Specifies the source of the document being scannedNotes:•Color Laser is the factory default setting. Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.•Black/White is used when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.•Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer.•Photo/Film is used when the original document is a photo from film•Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine.•Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper.•Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press.•Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer. |
| ColorColorGray | Specifies whether or not a job prints in grayscale or colorNote: Color is the factory default setting. |
| Resolution15020030040060075 | Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inchNote: 150 is the factory default setting. |
| Darkness1-9 | Lightens or darkens the outputNote: 5 is the factory default setting. |
| OrientationPortraitLandscape | Specifies the orientation of the scanned imageNote: Portrait is the factory default setting. |
| Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementUniversal4 x 6 in.3 x 5 in.Business CardCustom Scan Size [x]A4A5Oficio (Mexico)A6JIS B4JIS B5Book OriginalAuto Size SenseMixed Sizes | Specifies the paper size of the document being scannedNotes:A4 is the international factory default setting.Letter is the US factory default setting. |
| Sides (Duplex)OffLong edgeShort edge | Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape). |
| JPEG QualityBest for Content5-90 | Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the imageNotes:"Best for content" is the factory default setting.5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.This menu item applies to all scan functions. |
| Text Default5-90 | Sets the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the imageNote:75 is the factory default setting. |
| Text/Photo Default5-90 | Sets the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the imageNote:75 is the factory default setting. |
| Photo Default5-90 | Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the imageNote:50 is the factory default setting. |
| E-mail images sent asAttachmentWeb Link | Specifies how the images will be sentNote: Attachment is the factory default setting. |
| Use Multi-Page TIFFOnOff | Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan-to-e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.Notes:On is the factory default setting.This menu item applies to all scan functions. |
| Transmission LogPrint logDo not print logPrint only for error | Specifies whether or not the transmission log printsNote: Print log is the factory default setting. |
| Log Paper SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder | Specifies the paper source for printing e-mail logsNote: Tray 1 is the factory default setting. |
| Log Output BinStandard BinBin [x] | Specifies an exit bin for e-mail logsNotes:Standard Bin is the factory default setting.Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed. |
| E-mail Bit Depth8 bit1 bit | Enables the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when Color is set to OffNote: 8 bit is the factory default setting. |
| Custom Job scanningOffOn | Lets you copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizesNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Scan PreviewOffOn | Specifies whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobsNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff | Lets you save e-mail addresses as shortcutsNotes:On is the factory default setting.When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail Destination screen. |
| Background Removal-4 to 4 | Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned imageNote: 0 is the factory default setting. |
| Color BalanceCyan - RedMagenta - GreenYellow - Blue | Enables an equal balance of colors in the output |
| Color DropoutColor DropoutNoneRedGreenBlueDefault Red Threshold0-255Default Green Threshold0-255Default Blue Threshold0-255 | Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease the dropoutNotes:None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold. |
| ContrastBest for content0-5 | Specifies the contrast of the outputNote: “Best for content” is the factory default setting. |
| Mirror ImageOffOn | Creates a mirror image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Negative ImageOffOn | Creates a negative image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Shadow Detail-4 to 4 | Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned imageNote: 0 is the factory default setting. |
| ADF Skew FixOffOn | Corrects slight skew in the scanned imageNote: Off is the factory default setting |
| Scan edge to edgeOffOn | Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edgeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Sharpness1-5 | Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned imageNote: 3 is the factory default setting. |
| Temperature-4 to 4 | Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. “Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default. |
| Use cc:/bcc:OffOn | Enables the use of the cc: and bcc: fieldsNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
FTP Settings menu
| Menu item Description | |
| FormatPDF (.pdf)Secure PDF (.pdf)TIFF (.tif)JPEG (.jpg)XPS (.xps) | Specifies the format of the FTP fileNote: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting. |
| PDF Version1.51.6A-1a1.21.31.4 | Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTPNote: 1.5 is the factory default setting. |
| Content TypeTextGraphicsText/PhotoPhoto | Specifies the type of content that will be scanned to FTPNotes:•Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.•Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.• Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.• Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image. |
| Content SourceColor LaserInkjetMagazinePressBlack/White LaserPhoto/FilmNewspaperOther | Specifies how content will be producedNotes:• Color Laser is the factory default setting. Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.• Black/White is used when the original document was printed using a black/white laser printer.• Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using a inkjet printer.• Photo/Film is used when the original document is a photo from film• Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine.• Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper.• Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press.• Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer. |
| ColorColorGray | Specifies whether a job prints in grayscale or colorNote: Color is the factory default setting. |
| Resolution15020030040060075 | Specifies how many dots per inch are scannedNote: 150 dpi is the factory default setting. |
| Darkness1-9 | Lightens or darkens the outputNote: 5 is the factory default setting. |
| OrientationPortraitLandscape | Specifies the orientation of the scanned imageNote: Portrait is the factory default setting. |
| Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementUniversal4 x 6 in.3 x 5 in.Business CardCustom Scan Size [x]A4A5Oficio (Mexico)A6JIS B4JIS B5Book OriginalAuto Size SenseMixed Sizes | Specifies the paper size of the document that is being scannedNotes:A4 is the international factory default setting.Letter is the US factory default setting. |
| Sides (Duplex)OffLong edgeShort edge | Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape). |
| JPEG QualityBest for Content5-90 | Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the imageNotes:“Best for content” is the factory default setting.5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.This menu item applies to all scan functions. |
| Text Default5-90 | Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the imageNote: 75 is the factory default setting. |
| Text/Photo Default5-90 | Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the imageNote: 75 is the factory default setting. |
| Photo Default5-90 | Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the imageNote: 50 is the factory default setting. |
| Use Multi-Page TIFFOnOff | Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.Notes:On is the factory default setting.This menu item applies to all scan functions. |
| Transmission LogPrint logDo not print logPrint only for error | Specifies whether the transmission log printsNote: “Print log” is the factory default setting. |
| Log Paper SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder | Specifies a paper source for FTP logsNote: Tray 1 is the factory default setting. |
| Log Output BinStandard BinBin [x] | Specifies an exit bin for FTP logsNotes:Standard Bin is the factory default setting.Bin [x] only appears when at least one optional exit bin is installed. |
| FTP bit Depth8 bit1 bit | Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when Color is set to OffNote: 8 bit is the factory default setting. |
| Base File Name Lets you enter a base file name | File nameNote: There is an image limitation of 53 characters. |
| Custom Job ScanningOffOn | Lets you copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single jobNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Scan PreviewOffOn | Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobsNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Allow Save as ShortcutOnOff | Enables shortcut creation for FTP addressesNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Background Removal-4 to 4 | Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copyNote: 0 is the factory default setting. |
| Color BalanceCyan - RedMagenta - GreenYellow - Blue | Enables an equal balance of colors in the output |
| Color DropoutColor DropoutNoneRedGreenBlueDefault Red Threshold0-255Default Green Threshold0-255Default Blue Threshold0-255 | Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease the dropoutNotes:None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold. |
| Contrast0-5Best for content | Specifies the contrast of the outputNote: “Best for content” is the factory default setting. |
| Mirror ImageOffOn | Creates a mirror image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Negative ImageOffOn | Creates a negative image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Shadow Detail-4 to 4 | Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned imageNote: 0 is the factory default setting. |
| ADF Skew FixOffOn | Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned imageNote: Off is the factory default setting |
| Scan edge to edgeOffOn | Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edgeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Sharpness1–5 | Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a scanned imageNote: 3 is the factory default setting. |
| Temperature-4 to 4 | Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. “Cool” values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default. |
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
| Menu item Description | |
| FormatPDF (.pdf)Secure PDFTIFF (.tif)JPEG (.jpg)XPS (.xps) | Specifies the format of the file to be sent through FTPNote: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting. |
| PDF Version1.2–1.6A-1a | Sets the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTPNote: 1.5 is the factory default setting. |
| Content TypeText/PhotoPhotoTextGraphics | Specifies the type of content that will be scanned through FTPNotes:•Text/Photo is the factory default setting. Text/Photo is used when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.•Text is used when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.• Graphics is used when the original document is mostly business-type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.• Photo is used when the document being scanned is mostly a photo or an image. |
| Content SourceColor LaserInkjetPhoto/FilmMagazineNewspaperPressOtherBlack and White Laser | Specifies the source of content in the scan jobNotes:•Color Laser is the factory default setting. Color Laser is used when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.•Black and White Laser is used when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.•Inkjet is used when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.•Photo/Film is used when the original document is a photo from film•Magazine is used when the original document is from a magazine.•Newspaper is used when the original document is from a newspaper.•Press is used when the original document was printed using a printing press.•Other is used when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer. |
| ColorOnOff | Specifies whether or not copies are printed in colorNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Resolution150 dpi200 dpi300 dpi400 dpi600 dpi75 dpi | Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi)Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting. |
| Darkness1-9 | Lightens or darkens the outputNote: 5 is the factory default setting. |
| OrientationPortraitLandscape | Specifies the orientation of the scanned imageNote: Portrait is the factory default setting. |
| Original SizeLetterLegalExecutiveFolioStatementUniversal4 x 6 in.3 x 5 in.Business CardCustom Scan Size [x]A4A5Oficio (Mexico)A6JIS B5Book OriginalAuto Size SenseMixed Sizes | Specifies the paper size of the original documentNote:Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default setting. |
| Sides (Duplex)OffLong edgeShort edge | Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on a pageNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape). |
| JPEG QualityBest for content5-90 | Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and qualityNotes:"Best for content" is the factory default setting.5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.This menu setting applies to all scan functions. |
| Text Default5-90 | Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the imageNote:75 is the factory default setting. |
| Text/Photo Default5-90 | Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the qualityNote:75 is the factory default setting. |
| Photo Default5-90 | Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the qualityNote:50 is the factory default setting. |
| Use Multi-Page TIFFOnOff | Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple-page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.Notes:On is the factory default setting.This menu setting applies to all scan functions. |
| Scan Bit Depth8 bit1 bit | Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1-bit images when Color is set to OffNote: 8 bit is the factory default setting. |
| File Name Lets you enter a base file name | Note:A maximum of 53 characters is allowed. |
| Custom Job ScanningOffOn | Lets you copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy jobNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Scan PreviewOffOn | Specifies whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobsNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Background Removal-4 to 4 | Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copyNote: 0 is the factory default setting. |
| Color BalanceCyan - RedMagenta - GreenYellow - Blue | Enables an equal balance of colors in the scanned image |
| Color DropoutColor DropoutNoneRedGreenBlueDefault Red Threshold0-255Default Green Threshold0-255Default Blue Threshold0-255 | Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease the dropoutNotes:None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold. |
| ContrastBest for content0-5 | Specifies the contrast of the scanned imageNote: “Best for content” is the factory default setting. |
| Mirror ImageOffOn | Creates a mirror image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Negative ImageOffOn | Creates a negative image of the original documentNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Shadow Detail-4 to 4 | Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned imageNote: 0 is the factory default setting. |
| ADF Skew FixOffOn | Specifies whether or not to fix slight skew on the scanned imageNote: Off is the factory default setting |
| Scan edge to edgeOffOn | Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edgeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Sharpness1–5 | Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned imageNote: 3 is the factory default setting. |
| Temperature-4 to 4 | Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool" values generate a bluer output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the default. |
Print Settings
| Copies1–999 | Specifies a default number of copies for each print jobNote: 1 is the factory default setting. |
| Paper SourceTray [x]Manual PaperMP FeederManual Envelope | Sets a default paper source for all print jobsNote: Tray 1 is the factory default setting. |
| ColorColorBlack Only | Generates color print jobs outputNote: Color is the factory default setting. |
| CollateOn (1,2,1,2,1,2)Off (1,1,1,2,2,2) | Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copiesNote: On is the factory default setting. |
| Sides (Duplex)1 sided2 sided | Specifies whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the pageNote: 1 sided is the factory default setting. |
| StapleOffOn | Specifies whether prints are stapledNotes:•Off is the factory default setting.•This menu appears only when a stapler is installed. |
| Hole PunchOffOn | Specifies whether prints have punched holesNotes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu appears only when a stapler is installed. |
| Hole Punch Mode2 holes3 holes4 holes | Determines the type of punch finishing performed on a printNotes:3 holes is the US factory default setting. 4 holes is the international factory default setting.This menu appears only when a puncher is installed. |
| Duplex BindingLong EdgeShort Edge | Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the pageNotes:Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape). |
| Paper Saver OrientationAutoLandscapePortrait | Specifies the orientation of a multiple-page documentNote: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape |
| Paper SaverOff2-Up3-Up4-Up6-Up9-Up12-Up16-Up | Specifies that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a paperNotes:Off is the factory default setting.The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side. |
| Paper Saver BorderNoneSolid | Prints a border around each page imageNote: None is the factory default setting. |
| Paper Saver OrderingHorizontalReverse HorizontalReverse VerticalVertical | Specifies the positioning of multiple-page imagesNotes:Horizontal is the factory default setting.Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation. |
| Separator SheetsOffBetween CopiesBetween JobsBetween Pages | Specifies whether blank separator sheets are insertedNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document for notes. |
| Separator Sheet SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder | Specifies the paper source for separator sheetsNotes:Tray 1 is the factory default setting.From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in order for Manual Feeder to appear as a menu setting. |
| Blank PagesDo Not PrintPrint | Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print jobNote: Do Not Print is the factory default setting. |
Print Settings
Setup menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Printer LanguagePS EmulationPCL Emulation | Sets the default printer languageNotes:PS Emulation is the factory default setting. PostScript emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs.PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print jobs.Setting a printer language default does not prevent a software program from sending print jobs that use another printer language. |
| Job WaitingOffOn | Specifies if print jobs are removed from the print queue when they require unavailable printer options or custom settings. These print jobs are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print normally. When the missing information and/or options are obtained, the stored jobs print.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.This menu item appears only if a non-read-only printer hard disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power. |
| Print AreaNormalFit to PageWhole Page | Sets the logical and physical printable areaNotes:Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to print data in the non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.Fit to Page fits the page content into the selected paper size.Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non-printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary. This setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter and has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or PostScript interpreter. |
| Black Only ModeOffOn | Sets the printer to print text and graphics using only the black print cartridgeNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Download TargetRAMFlashDisk | Sets the storage location for downloadsNotes:RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in RAM is temporary.Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the printer is turned off.This menu item appears only if a flash and/or disk option is installed. |
| Resource SaveOffOn | Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as fonts and macros stored in RAM, when the printer receives a print job that requires more memory than is availableNotes:Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.On sets the printer to retain downloads during language changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of memory, 38 Memory Full appears, but downloads are not deleted. |
| Print All OrderAlphabeticalOldest FirstNewest First | Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is selectedNotes:Alphabetical is the factory default setting.Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer control panel. |
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only if a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed. The printer hard disk cannot be read/write- or write-protected.
| Menu item Description | |
| Job Accounting LogOffOn | Determines if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receivesNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Job Accounting Utilities | Lets you print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive |
| Accounting Log FrequencyMonthlyWeekly | Determines how often a log file is createdNote: Monthly is the factory default setting. |
| Log Action at End of FrequencyNoneE-mail Current LogE-mail & Delete Current LogPost Current LogPost & Delete Current Log | Determines how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expiresNote: None is the factory default setting. |
| Disk Near Full Level1–99Off | Specifies the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near Full ActionNote: 5MB is the factory default setting. |
| Disk Near Full ActionNoneE-mail Current LogE-mail & Delete Current LogE-mail & Delete Oldest LogPost Current LogPost & Delete Current LogPost & Delete Oldest LogDelete Current LogDelete Oldest LogDelete All LogsDelete All But Current | Determines how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly fullNotes:None is the factory default setting.The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is triggered. |
| Disk Full ActionNoneE-mail & Delete Current LogE-mail & Delete Oldest LogPost & Delete Current LogPost & Delete Oldest LogDelete Current LogDelete Oldest LogDelete All LogsDelete All But Current | Determines how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit (100MB)Note: None is the factory default setting. |
| URL to Post Logs Determines where the printer posts job accounting logs | |
| E-mail Address to Send Logs | Specifies the e-mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs |
| Log File Prefix | Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log file prefix. |
Finishing menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Sides (Duplex)1 sided2 sided | Specifies whether duplex (2-sided) printing is set as the default for all print jobsNotes:1 sided is the factory default setting.You can set 2-sided printing from the software program. For Windows users, click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and pop-up menus. |
| Duplex BindingLong EdgeShort Edge | Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and how the printing on the back of the page is oriented in relation to the printing on the front of the pageNotes:Long Edge is the factory default setting. Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and left edge for landscape). |
| Copies1-999 | Specifies the default number of copies for each print jobNote: 1 is the factory default setting. |
| Blank PagesDo Not PrintPrint | Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print jobNote: Do Not Print is the factory default setting. |
| CollateOn (1,2,1,2,1,2)Off (1,1,1,2,2,2) | Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copiesNotes:On is the factory default setting.On stacks the print job in sequence. |
| Separator SheetsOffBetween CopiesBetween JobsBetween Pages | Specifies whether blank separator sheets are insertedNotes:Off is the factory default setting.Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document. |
| Separator SourceTray [x]Manual Feeder | Specifies the paper source for separator sheetsNotes:Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette for Manual Feeder to appear as a menu setting. |
| Paper SaverOff2-Up3-Up4-Up6-Up9-Up12-Up16-Up | Specifies that multiple-page images be printed on one side of a paperNotes:Off is the factory default setting.The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side. |
| Paper Saver OrderingHorizontalReverse HorizontalReverse VerticalVertical | Specifies the positioning of multiple-page imagesNotes:Horizontal is the factory default setting.Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or landscape orientation. |
| Paper Saver OrientationAutoLandscapePortrait | Specifies the orientation of a multiple-page documentNote: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape. |
| Paper Saver BorderNoneSolid | Prints a border on each page image.Note: None is the factory default setting. |
| Staple JobOffOn | Specifies whether prints are stapledNote: This menu appears only when a stapler is installed. |
| Hole PunchOffOn | Specifies whether prints have punched holesNote: This menu appears only when a puncher is installed. |
| Hole Punch Mode2 holes3 holes4 holes | Determines the type of punch finishing performed on a printNotes:3 holes is the US factory default setting. 4 holes is the international factory default setting.This menu appears only when a puncher is installed. |
| Offset PagesNoneBetween CopiesBetween Jobs | Offsets pages at certain instancesNotes:None is the factory default setting.Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, each set of printed pages are offset, such as all page 1's and all page 2's.Between Jobs sets the same offset position for the entire print job regardless of the number of copies printed.This menu appears only when a stapler is installed. |
Quality menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Print ModeColorBlack Only | Specifies whether images are printed in color or in black and whiteNote: Color is the factory default setting. |
| Color CorrectionAutoOffManual | Adjusts the color output on the printed pageNotes:Auto is the factory default setting. Auto applies different color conversion tables to each object on the printed page.Off turns off color correction.Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available from the Manual Color menu.Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors, certain colors that appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page. |
| Print Resolution4800 CQ1200 dpi | Specifies the printed output resolutionNote: 4800 CQ is the factory default setting. |
| Toner Darkness1-5 | Lightens or darkens the printed outputNotes:4 is the factory default setting.Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.If Print Mode is set to Black Only, then a setting of 5 increases toner density and darkness to all print jobs.If Print Mode is set to Color, then a setting of 5 is the same as a setting of 4. |
| Enhance Fine LinesOffOn | Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical circuit diagrams, and flow chartsNotes:Off is the factory default setting.You can set this option from the software program. For Windows users, click File > Print > Properties > Preferences > Options, or Setup. For Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the print dialog and pop-up menus.To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer IP address in a browser window. |
| Color SaverOffOn | Reduces the amount of toner used for graphics and images. The amount of toner used for text is not reduced.Notes:Off is the factory default setting.On overrides Toner Darkness settings. |
| RGB Brightness-6 to 6 | Adjusts brightness in color outputsNotes:0 is the factory default setting.-6 is the maximum decrease. 6 is the maximum increase.This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used. |
| RGB Contrast0-5 | Adjusts contrast in color outputsNotes:0 is the factory default setting.This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used. |
| RGB Saturation0-5 | Adjusts saturation in color outputsNotes:0 is the factory default setting.This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used. |
| Color BalanceCyan-5 to 5Magenta-5 to 5Yellow-5 to 5Black-5 to 5Reset Defaults0 | Adjusts color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner being used for each colorNote:0 is the factory default setting. |
| Color SamplessRGB DisplaysRGB VividDisplay—True BlackVividOff—RGBUS CMYKEuro CMYKVivid CMYKOff—CMYK | Prints sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the printerNotes:Selecting any setting prints the sample.Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK combination that creates the color observed. These pages can be used to help decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed output.From a browser window, type the IP address of the printer to access a complete list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server. |
| Manual ColorRGB ImageVividsRGB DisplayDisplay True BlacksRGB VividOffRGB TextVividsRGB DisplayDisplay True BlacksRGB VividOffRGB GraphicsVividsRGB DisplayDisplay True BlacksRGB VividOff | Customizes the RGB color conversionsNotes:sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image. This applies a color conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer monitor.sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics. sRGB Vivid applies a color table that increases saturation. This is preferred for business graphics and text.Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter, more saturated colors.Display—True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner for neutral gray colors.Off turns off color conversion. |
| Manual ColorCMYK ImageUS CMYKEuro CMYKVivid CMYKOffCMYK TextUS CMYKEuro CMYKVivid CMYKOffCMYK GraphicsUS CMYKEuro CMYKVivid CMYKOff | Customizes the CMYK color conversionsNotes:US CMYK is the US factory default setting. US CMYK applies a color conversion table that tries to produce output that matches SWOP color output.Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting. Euro CMYK applies a color conversion table that tries to produce output that matches EuroScale color output.Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US CMYK color conversion table.Off turns off color conversion. |
| Spot Color Replacement | Allows users to create and save custom spot colors with corresponding CMYK values |
| Color Adjust | Initiates a recalibration of color conversion tables and allows the printer to make adjustments for color variations in outputNotes:Adjusting color starts when the menu is selected.Adjusting appears on the display until the process is finished.Color variations in output sometimes result from changeable conditions such as room temperature and humidity. Color adjustments are made on printer algorithms. Color alignment is also recalibrated in this process. |
Utilities menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Remove Held JobsConfidentialHeldNot RestoredAll | Removes confidential and held jobs from the printer hard diskNotes:Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not affected.Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that arenotrestored from the printer hard disk or memory. |
| Format FlashYesNo | Formats the flash memoryWarning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is being formatted.Notes:Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.No cancels the format request.Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option card in the printer.A flash memory option card must be installed in the printer and operating properly for this menu item to be available.The flash memory option card must not be read/write- or write-protected. |
| Delete Downloads on DiskDelete NowDo Not Delete | Removes downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs, and parked jobsNotes:Delete Now configures the printer control panel to return to the originating screen after the deletion process is completed.Do Not Delete sets the printer control panel to return to the main Utilities menu. |
| Activate Hex Trace Assists in isolating | the source of a print job problemNotes:When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and character representation, and control codes are not executed.To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn the printer off or reset the printer. |
| Coverage EstimatorOffOn | Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.Note: Off is the factory default setting. |
XPS menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Print Error PagesOffOn | Prints a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errorsNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
PDF menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Scale to FitNoYes | Scales page content to fit the selected paper sizeNote: No is the factory default setting. |
| AnnotationsDo Not PrintPrint | Prints annotations in a PDFNote: Do Not Print is the factory default setting. |
PostScript menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Print PS ErrorOffOn | Prints a page containing the PostScript errorNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Lock PS Startup ModeOffOn | Enables users to disable the SysStart fileNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Font PriorityResidentFlash/Disk | Establishes the font search orderNotes:•Resident is the factory default setting.•This menu item is available only if a formatted flash memory option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.•Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not read/write-, write-, or password-protected.•Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%. |
| Image SmoothingOffOn | Enhances the contrast and sharpness of low-resolution images and smooths their color transitionsNotes:•Off is the factory default setting.•Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in resolution. |
PCL Emul menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Font SourceResidentDiskDownloadFlashAll | Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu itemNotes:•Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of fonts downloaded in RAM.•Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option. Make sure the flash option is properly formatted and is not read/write-, or password-protected.•Download shows all the fonts downloaded in RAM.•All shows all fonts available to any option. |
| Font NameRO Courier | Identifies a specific font and where it is storedNote: RO Courier is the factory default setting. The RO Courier format shows the font name, font ID, and storage location in the printer. The font source abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for Download. |
| Symbol Set10U PC-812U PC-850 | Specifies the symbol set for each font nameNotes:10U PC-8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC-850 is the international factory default setting.A symbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters, punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown. |
| PCL Emulation SettingsPoint Size1.00–1008.00 | Changes the point size for scalable typographic fontsNotes:12 is the factory default setting.Point Size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point equals approximately 1/72 of an inch.Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25-point increments. |
| PCL Emulation SettingsPitch0.08–100 | Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fontsNotes:10 is the factory default setting.Pitch refers to the number of fixed-space characters per inch (cpi).Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01-cpi increments.For non-scalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but cannot be changed. |
| PCL Emulation SettingsOrientationPortraitLandscape | Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on a pageNotes:Portrait is the factory default setting.Portrait prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the page.Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page. |
| PCL Emulation SettingsLines per Page1–255 | Specifies the number of lines that print on each pageNotes:60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page. |
| PCL Emulation SettingsA4 Width198 mm203 mm | Sets the printer to print on A4-size paperNotes:198 mm is the factory default setting.The 203-mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of eighty 10-pitch characters. |
| PCL Emulation SettingsAuto CR after LFOffOn | Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after a line feed (LF) control commandNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| PCL Emulation SettingsAuto LF after CROffOn | Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a carriage return (CR) control commandNote: Off is the factory default setting. |
| Tray RenumberAssign MP FeederOffNone0-199Assign Tray [x]OffNone0-199Assign Manual PaperOffNone0-199Assign Manual EnvOffNone0-199 | Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feedersNotes:Off is the factory default setting.None ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This selection is displayed only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter.0-199 allows a custom setting to be assigned. |
| Tray RenumberView Factory DefaultsMPF Default = 8T1 Default = 1T2 Default = 4T3 Default = 5T4 Default = 20T5 Default = 21Env Default = 6MPaper Default = 2MEnv Default = 3 | Displays the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder |
| Tray RenumberRestore DefaultsYesNo | Returns all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings |
HTML menu
| Menu Item Description | ||
| Font Name | Joanna MT | Sets the default font for HTML documents |
| Albertus MT | Letter Gothic | Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not specify a font. |
| Antique Olive | Lubalin Graph | |
| Apple Chancery | Marigold | |
| Arial MT | MonaLisa Recut | |
| Avant Garde | Monaco | |
| Bodoni | New CenturySbk | |
| Bookman | New York | |
| Chicago | Optima | |
| Clarendon | Oxford | |
| Cooper Black | Palatino | |
| Copperplate | StempelGaramond | |
| Coronet | Taffy | |
| Courier | Times | |
| Eurostile | TimesNewRoman | |
| Garamond | Univers | |
| Geneva | Zapf Chancery | |
| Gill Sans | NewSansMTCS | |
| Goudy | NewSansMTCT | |
| Helvetica | New SansMTJA | |
| Hoefler Text | NewSansMTKO | |
| Intl CG Times | ||
| Intl Courier | ||
| Intl Univers | ||
| Menu item Description | |
| Font Size1–255 pt | Sets the default font size for HTML documentsNotes:•12 pt is the factory default setting. • Font size can be increased in 1-point increments. |
| Scale1–400% | Scales the default font for HTML documentsNotes:•100% is the factory default setting. • Scaling can be increased in 1% increments. |
| OrientationPortraitLandscape | Sets the page orientation for HTML documentsNote: Portrait is the factory default setting. |
| Margin Size8–255 mm | Sets the page margin for HTML documentsNotes:•19 mm is the factory default setting.• Margin size can be increased in 1-mm increments. |
| BackgroundsPrintDo Not Print | Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documentsNote: Print is the factory default setting. |
Image menu
| Menu item Description | |
| Auto FitOnOff | Selects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientationNote: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings for some images. |
| InvertOffOn | Inverts bi-tonal monochrome imagesNotes:•Off is the factory default setting.•This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images. |
| ScalingBest FitAnchor CenterFit Height/WidthFit HeightFit WidthAnchor Top Left | Scales the image to fit the selected paper sizeNotes:•Best Fit is the factory default setting.•When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit. |
| OrientationPortraitLandscapeRev PortraitRev Landscape | Sets the image orientationNote: Portrait is the factory default setting. |
Help menu
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer.
Other translations are available on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
| Menu item Description | |
| Print All Guides Prints all the guides | |
| Copy Guide Provides information about | making copies and changing settings |
| Fax Guide Provides information about se | sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings |
| E-mail Guide | Provides information about sending e-mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings |
| FTP Guide Provides information about sc | anning documents directly to an FTP server using an FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings |
| Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints | |
| Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information | |
| Supplies Guide Provides part numbers for ordering supplies | |
Securing the memory before moving the printer
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that are capable of storing device and network settings, information from embedded solutions, and user data. The types of memory—along with the types of data stored by each—are described below.
- Volatile memory—Your device utilizes standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy jobs.
- Non-volatile memory—Your device may utilize two forms of non-volatile memory: EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information, scanner and bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
- Hard disk memory—Some devices have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality and cannot be used for long term storage for data that is not print-related. The hard disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information, create folders, create disk or network file shares, or FTP information directly from a client device. The hard disk can retain buffered user data from complex scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
There are several circumstances under which you might wish to erase the contents of the memory devices installed in your printer. A partial list includes:
•The printer is being decommissioned
•The printer hard drive is being replaced
•The printer is being moved to a different department or location
•The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization
- The printer is being removed from your premises for service
•The printer is being sold to another organization
Disposing of a hard drive
Note: Not all printers have a hard disk installed.
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to ensure that confidential data stored on the printer hard disk cannot be accessed once the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises. While most data can be erased electronically, you may want to consider one or more of the following actions before disposing of a printer or hard disk:
- Degaussing—Flushes the hard drive with a magnetic field that erases stored data
- Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
- Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: While most data can be erased electronically, the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each memory device on which data could have been stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed on your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered data, simply power down the device.
Erasing non-volatile memory
- Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
- Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.
3 Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer will reboot several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords on the printer.
4 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will power-on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Note: Your printer may not have a hard disk installed.
Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus enables you to remove residual confidential material left by scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down and 6MNC while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.
3 Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
- Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
- Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22-M standard for securely erasing data from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping. A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
Note: Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.
5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will power-on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Note: Your printer may not have a hard disk installed.
Enabling hard disk encryption helps prevent the loss of sensitive data in the event your printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
2 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
- Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk.
- Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.
3 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. Once the printer is fully powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or Fax.
3 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
Notes:
- Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
- Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable for other user tasks.
5 Touch Back, and then Exit Config Menu.
The printer will power-on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Maintaining the printer
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.
Cleaning the exterior of the printer
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin.
3 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of the printer.
4 Wipe only the outside of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit bin.
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.
5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job.
Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner cover.
text_image
Diagram of a printer with labeled parts including open lid, paper holder, and printer casing| 1 White underside of the ADF cover |
| 2 White underside of the scanner cover |
| 3 Scanner glass |
| 4 ADF glass |
3 Wipe the areas shown and let them dry.
4 Open the bottom ADF door.
text_image
Diagram showing a printer with labeled parts, highlighting a device component with red arrows indicating movement or assembly.5 Wipe the ADF scanner glass under the ADF door.
6 Close the bottom ADF door.
7 Close the scanner cover.
Cleaning the ADF parts
Clean the ADF parts periodically to maintain optimal printing performance. Residue on the ADF parts may cause print quality issues and false 280–299 paper jam messages.
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth with water.
3 Open the ADF cover.
natural_image
Diagram of an open computer case with internal components and a red arrow indicating a directional flow (no text or symbols present)4 Remove the pick roller assembly.
text_image
Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and directional arrows indicating motion or flow.5 Wipe the surface of both pick rollers.
6 Replace the pick roller assembly.
text_image
Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with numbered components and directional arrows indicating flow or movement.7 Wipe the entire surface under the ADF cover.
8 Close the ADF cover.
natural_image
Diagram of a printer's internal structure showing a green component being inserted, with a red arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)Cleaning the printhead lenses
Clean the printhead lenses when you encounter print quality problems.
1 Open the front door.
natural_image
3D diagram of a printer with color-coded internal components and an open door, showing no text or symbols.2 Remove all print cartridges.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny area on the photoconductor drum. Doing so can damage the photoconductor.
natural_image
3D diagram of a device interior showing internal components and a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)3 Locate the four printhead lenses.
natural_image
Mechanical assembly diagram showing three red arrows pointing to structural components (no text or labels visible)4 Clean the lenses using compressed air.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the printhead lenses.
5 Reinstall the print cartridges.
6 Close the front door.
natural_image
3D illustration of a printer with color-coded internal components and an open door (no text or symbols)Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
- Direct sunlight
•Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
•High humidity above 80%
• Salty air
•Corrosive gases
•Heavy dust
Checking the status of supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.
Checking the status of supplies from the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.
Checking the status of supplies from a network computer
Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the printer.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Device Status.
The Device Status page appears, displaying a summary of supply levels.
Ordering supplies
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web Site at www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Notes:
•The toner gauge is an estimate of how much toner is left in your cartridge.
- All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter- or A4-size plain paper.
Ordering a print cartridge
When 88 [color] cartridge low or 88 [color] cartridge nearly low appears, order a new cartridge.
Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19798 standard. Extremely low print coverage (less than 1.25% ) for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield and may cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner.
Recommended print cartridge and part number
| Part name | Lexmark Return Program Cartridge | Regular cartridge |
| Cyan Print Cartridge | C792A1CG | C792A2CG |
| Cyan Extra High Yield Print Cartridge | C792X1CG | C792X2CG |
| Magenta Print Cartridge | C792A1MG | C792A2MG |
| Magenta Extra High Yield Print Cartridge | C792X1MG | C792X2MG |
| Yellow Print Cartridge | C792A1YG | C792A2YG |
| Yellow Extra High Yield Print Cartridge | C792X1YG | C792X2YG |
| Black Print Cartridge | C792A1KG | C792A2KG |
| Black Extra High Yield Print Cartridge | C792X1KG | C792X2KG |
Ordering a fuser or a transfer module
When 80 Fuser Life Warning or 83 Transfer Module Life Warning appears, order a replacement fuser or a transfer module.
When 80 Replace Fuser or 83 Replace Transfer Module appears, install the new fuser or the new transfer module. For installation information, see the documentation that came with the part.
| Part name Part number | |
| Fuser 40X7102 (100 volts) | 40X7100 (115 volts)40X7101 (230 volts) |
| Transfer Module 40X7103 |
Ordering a waste toner bottle
When 82 Waste toner bottle nearly full appears, order a replacement waste toner bottle.
When 82 Replace waste toner bottle appears, replace the waste toner bottle.
Note: Waste toner bottle reuse is not recommended.
| Part name Part number | |
| Waste toner bottle C792X77G |
Ordering staple cartridges
When Staples Low or Staples Empty appears, order the specified staple cartridge.
For more information, see the illustrations inside the stapler door.
| Part name Part number | |
| Staple Cartridges–3 pack(Since a pack contains 5,000 staples, a 3-pack contains 15,000 staples.) | 25A0013 |
Ordering an ADF kit
Order an ADF kit if you experience problems with paper double-feeding or paper failing to feed through the ADF.
| Part name Part number | |
| ADF kit 40X7220 |
Ordering a cleaning kit
Use the wet and dry wipes from the cleaning kit to clean the touch screen.
| Part name Part number | |
| Cleaning kit (wet and dry wipes) 40X0392 |
Replacing supplies
Replacing a print cartridge
1 Open the front door.
natural_image
Diagram of a printer with color-coded internal components and an open door, showing no text or symbols.2 Lift the green handle and pull the print cartridge. Grasp the top handle and lift the cartridge out of the machine.
natural_image
3D diagram of a device interior with colored blocks and wiring, no visible text or symbols3 Place the old cartridge in the replacement cartridge shipping box, and then attach the return label to the box for shipping.
text_image
Diagram showing a printer box being open with a red arrow indicating compression or disassembly, and an inset image of a document with text.4 Unpack a new print cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.
text_image
Diagram illustrating a printer's internal structure with labeled parts and red arrows indicating assembly or transformation.5 Shake the new cartridge front-to-back and side-to-side to evenly distribute the toner.
natural_image
3D diagram of a mechanical component with red arrows indicating rotational direction (no text or symbols)6 Remove the red packing strip from the new cartridge.
natural_image
Diagram showing two mechanical components with red dashed lines indicating motion or force, one with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels present)7 Insert the new cartridge into the printer, and then push the green handle back in place.
Note: Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.
natural_image
3D diagram of a mechanical assembly with colored components and red arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)8 Close the front door.
natural_image
Diagram of a printer with internal components and a red arrow indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols present)Replacing the waste toner bottle
Replace the waste toner bottle when 82.xx Replace waste toner bottle appears. The printer will not continue printing until the waste toner bottle is replaced.
1 Remove the replacement waste toner bottle from its shipping box, and then unpack it.
text_image
Diagram illustrating two steps of a printer's open box: adding a document and adding a package to a bag, with red arrows indicating the process.2 Open the printer front door, and then open tray 1.
3 Pull the green tabs sideways, and then grasp and pull the tabs with both hands to remove the waste toner bottle.
text_image
Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with numbered annotations and red arrows indicating process steps4 Place the waste toner bottle in the recycling bag.
5 Place the bag into the shipping box you removed the replacement part from.
text_image
Diagram showing two steps of packaging or assembly process with numbered arrows indicating sequence6 Peel the recycling label off, and place it on the shipping box.
text_image
Diagram showing two steps of a document processing or storage procedure: step 1 shows file scanning with red arrows indicating compression, and step 2 shows storage with red arrows indicating release.7 Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer.
text_image
Diagram showing a printer's internal structure with numbered annotations indicating process steps and directional arrows.8 Close tray 1, and then close the front door.
Moving the printer
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:
- Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
- Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
- Lift the printer off of the optional drawer and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it off the optional drawer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer warranty.
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
- Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Any cart used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.
- Keep the printer in an upright position.
- Avoid severe jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Administrative support
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Using the Embedded Web Server
If the printer is installed on a network, then the Embedded Web Server is available for a range of functions including:
•Viewing a virtual display of the printer control panel
- Checking the status of the printer supplies
- Configuring printer settings
- Configuring network settings
•Viewing reports
To access the Embedded Web Server for your printer:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Notes:
- If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page, and then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
- If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Embedded Web Server correctly.
2 Press Enter.
Checking the virtual display
1 Open an Embedded Web Server associated with your printer.
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel, showing printer messages.
Checking the status of the printer
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Device Status.
The device status shows the following:
•Paper tray settings
•Level of toner in the print cartridge
•Percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit
•Capacity measurements of certain printer parts
Setting up e-mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e-mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click E-mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items for notification, and type the e-mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e-mail server, contact your system support person.
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the printer, the network, and supplies.
To view reports from a network printer:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring the factory default settings.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now > Submit
Clearing jams
By carefully selecting paper and loading it properly, you can avoid most jams. If jams do occur, follow the steps outlined in this section.
To clear a jam message and resume printing, clear the entire paper path, and then touch Continue, jam cleared. If Jam Recovery is set to On, then the printer prints a new copy of the page that jammed. If Jam Recovery is set to Auto, then the printer reprints the jammed page if enough printer memory is available.
Avoiding jams
Paper tray recommendations
•Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray.
- Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
- Push the tray in firmly after loading paper.
- Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it prior to printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
- Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.
- Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly against the paper or envelopes.
Paper recommendations
- Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
- Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
- Flex and straighten paper before loading it.
natural_image
Two diagrams showing a person folding a book and holding a curved-bound document, with red arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols present)- Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
- Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
- Make sure all sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.
- Store paper per manufacturer recommendations.
Understanding jam numbers and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears on the display. Open doors and covers and remove trays to access jam locations. To resolve any paper jam message, you must clear all jammed paper from the paper path.
text_image
Labeled diagram of a printer stack with numbered components for identification| Area Jam numbers What to do | |
| 1 200–239 Open side door, and then remove the jammed paper. | |
| 2 24x Open side door of the specified tray, and then remove the jammed paper. | |
| 3 250 Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and then remove the jammed paper. | |
| 4 280–289 Remove all paper from the ADF, and then remove the jammed paper. | |
| 290–292 Close the ADF cover. | |
| 5 400–403460–461 | Open the paper transport unit door, and then remove the jammed paper. |
| 6 431–438 | Push the button to slide the finisher to the right, open the finisher door, and then remove the jammed paper. |
| 7 455 Open staple door, remove the staple cartridge, and then remove the jammed staple. | |
200 paper jam
1 Open the side door of the printer.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.
natural_image
Diagram of a server room interior showing internal components and a red arrow indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols present)Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the side door of the printer.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
201 paper jam
1 Open the side door of the printer.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2 Determine where the jam is located, and then remove it:
a If paper is inside the fuser unit, then open the fuser access door.
text_image
Diagram showing a printer or printer with labeled parts and an inset magnified view highlighting a green component.b Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the center of the fuser unit. Doing so will damage the fuser.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the side door of the printer.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
202–203 paper jams
If paper is visible in the standard exit bin, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
natural_image
Illustration of a printer with a paper feeding into the cover, showing internal structure and a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)Paper jam in the fuser
1 Open the side door of the printer.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2 If paper is visible inside the fuser unit, then open the fuser access door.
text_image
Diagram of a printer internal structure with numbered annotations indicating parts of the printer's internal components.3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the center of the fuser unit. Doing so will damage the fuser.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4 Close the side door.
Paper jam under the fuser
1 Open the side door of the printer.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2 If paper is visible under the fuser, then firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the side door of the printer.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
230 paper jam
1 Open the side door of the printer.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2 Slide the latch to open the duplex cover.
text_image
Diagram of a printer internal structure with numbered annotations indicating parts of the printer's internal components.3 Grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
natural_image
Interior view of a printer or printer unit showing internal components and paper feed (no visible text or symbols)4 Close the duplex cover.
5 Close the side door of the printer.
6 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
231–239 paper jams
1 Open the side door of the printer.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2 Slide the latch to open the duplex cover.
text_image
Diagram of a printer internal structure with numbered annotations indicating parts of the printer's internal components.3 Grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
natural_image
Interior view of a printer's internal structure showing paper feeding into a printer (no text or symbols visible)4 Close the duplex cover.
5 Close the side door of the printer.
6 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
24x paper jam
Paper jam in Tray 1
1 Open the side door.
2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
3 Close the side door.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
Paper jam in the optional trays
1 Open the side door of the specified optional tray.
2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
natural_image
Illustration of a cabinet interior with an open drawer and storage tray (no text or symbols visible)3 Close the side door.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
250 paper jam
1 Push the paper pick tab, and then remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder.
text_image
Diagram showing printer printing process with numbered annotations indicating steps 1 and 2Warning—Potential Damage: Pulling the paper out, without pushing the paper pick tab first, may cause the paper pick tab to break.
2 Grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
text_image
Diagram showing printer paper processing with numbered annotations and a magnified view highlighting a printer's tip.Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder, and then adjust the paper guides.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
280–289 paper jams
1 Remove all original documents from the ADF.
2 Open the ADF cover.
natural_image
Diagram of an open computer with a highlighted internal component and directional arrow (no text or symbols)3 Grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4 Close the ADF cover.
natural_image
Diagram of a printer internal structure with a red arrow indicating a process or operation (no text or symbols present)5 Reload original documents into the ADF, straighten the stack, and then adjust the paper guide.
6 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
290–292 paper jams
290 paper jam
Close the ADF cover.
291 paper jam
Close the scanner glass cover.
292 paper jam
Try one of more of the following:
- Close the ADF cover.
- Close the scanner cover.
- Contact your system support system person.
400–403 and 460–461 paper jams
1 Open the paper transport unit door.
natural_image
Diagram of a printer with a red arrow pointing to the internal structure (no text or symbols visible)2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the paper transport unit door.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
431–438 paper jams
1 Push down the button to slide the output finisher to the right.
text_image
Diagram showing printer operation with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating process flow2 Open the finisher door, and then removed the jammed paper.
natural_image
Diagram of a printer's internal mechanism with a red arrow indicating the process (no text or symbols present)Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close the finisher door.
4 Slide the finisher back until it clicks in place.
5 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
455 staple jam
1 Press the latch to open the stapler door.
Note: The stapler door is located behind the finisher.
natural_image
3D diagram of a device with a green component and red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)2 Lower the latch of the staple cartridge holder, and then pull the staple cartridge holder out of the printer.
text_image
Diagram showing a device with two labeled parts (① and ②) indicating process steps, highlighting a green component being removed.3 Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard, and then remove any jammed or loose staples.
natural_image
3D technical illustration of a mechanical housing component with green frame and red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)4 Close the staple guard.
natural_image
3D rendering of a mechanical component with green and red directional arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)5 Press down on the staple guard until it clicks into place.
6 Push the staple cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the staple cartridge holder clicks into place.
natural_image
Diagram of a computer interface showing an open device with a green arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols present)7 Close the stapler door.
8 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
Troubleshooting
Solving basic printer problems
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:
- The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
- The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
- The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
- Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
•The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.
- The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network device.
- All options are properly installed.
•The printer driver settings are correct.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on. This often fixes the problem.
Understanding printer messages
Adjusting color
Wait for the process to complete.
An error has occurred with the USB drive. Please remove and reinsert drive.
Try one or more of the following:
- Remove and reinsert the flash drive.
- If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacement.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
- Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
- Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following
- Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
- Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
- Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
- Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
- Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
- Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
- Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type]
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
- Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
- Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
- Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the printer control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.
- Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Close paper transport cover
Close the paper transport unit cover or door.
Close the left side door of the printer.
Close [tray] door
Close the specified tray door.
Close the side door of the finisher.
Close finisher top cover
Close the top cover of the finisher.
Close front door
Close the front door of the printer.
Close top access cover
Close the specified door or cover.
Disk corrupted
The printer attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted hard disk, and the hard disk cannot be repaired. The hard disk must be reformatted.
Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk.
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
- Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
•Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Disk problem
The printer hard disk must be reformatted.
Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk.
Empty the hole punch box
1 Empty the hole punch box.
For instructions on emptying the hole punch box, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Reinsert the hole punch box into the finisher, and then touch Continue to clear the message.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device has been inserted. Remove the USB device, and then install a supported one.
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
The fax partition appears to be corrupted. Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to clear the message.
- Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
The printer is in Fax Server mode, but the Fax Server setup has not been completed.
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to clear the message.
- Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Fax Station Name not set up
The Fax Station Name has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to clear the message.
- Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Fax Station Number not set up
The Fax Station Number has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to clear the message.
- Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Install bin [x]
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the specified bin:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the specified bin.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
- Cancel the print job.
Install Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Install the specified tray:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the specified tray.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
- Cancel the print job.
Insert the hole punch box
Insert the hole punch box into the finisher, and then touch Continue to clear the message.
Insert Tray [x]
Insert the specified tray into the printer.
Insert staple cartridge
Try one or more of the following:
- Insert a staple cartridge.
- Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple finisher.
Install envelope feeder
Try one or more of the following:
•Install the envelope feeder:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the envelope feeder.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
- Cancel the print job.
Load [src] with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
- Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
- Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default paper source.
- Cancel the print job.
Load [src] with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
- Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
- Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default paper source.
- Cancel the print job.
Load [src] with [size]
Try one or more of the following:
- Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
- Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, it feeds from the default paper source.
- Cancel the print job.
Load [src] with [type] [size]
Try one or more of the following:
- Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
- Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, it feeds from the default paper source.
- Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
- Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.
- Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
- Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
- Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
- Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.
- Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
- Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
- Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
- Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.
- Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
- Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
- Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
- Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.
- Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
- Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
- Cancel the print job.
Load staples
Try one or more of the following:
-Replace the specified staple cartridge in the finisher.
- Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Note: The print job will be stapled if the staple cartridge is replaced or inserted.
- Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Memory full, cannot print faxes
There is not enough memory to print the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been restarted.
Reattach bin [x]
Try one or more of the following:
- Turn the printer off and then back on.
•Reattach the specified bin:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the specified bin.
4 Reattach the bin.
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6 Turn the printer back on.
- Remove the specified bin:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the specified bin.
4 Contact Customer Support.
- Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bin.
Reattach bin [x] - [y]
Try one or more of the following:
- Turn the printer off and then back on.
•Reattach the specified bins:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the specified bins.
4 Reattach the bins.
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6 Turn the printer back on.
- Remove the specified bins:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the specified bins.
4 Contact Customer Support.
- Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bins.
Remove packaging material, [area name]
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.
Remove paper from bin [x]
Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing. If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Remove paper from all bins
Output bins have reached their capacity. Remove paper from all output bins to clear the message and continue printing.
Remove paper from [linked set bin name]
Remove paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing. If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk.
- Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.
Scanner automatic feeder cover open
Close the ADF cover.
Slide finisher to the left
Slide the mailbox or finisher to the left until it clicks into place.
Some held jobs were not restored
Touch Continue to delete the specified job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.
Supply needed to complete job
A supply needed to complete the job is missing. Touch Cancel to clear the message.
Tray [x] paper size unsupported
The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported. Replace it with a supported paper size.
Unsupported disk
An unsupported disk has been inserted. Remove the unsupported disk, and then install a supported one.
31.xx Missing or defective [color] cartridge
Try one or more of the following:
1 Remove and reinstall the specified print cartridge.
For instructions on removing a print cartridge, touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message is not cleared, then replace the defective print cartridge.
32.xx [color] cartridge part number unsupported by device
1 Remove the unsupported print cartridge, and then install a supported one.
For instructions on removing a print cartridge, touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message.
34 Incorrect paper size, open [src]
Try one or more of the following:
- Load the appropriate paper or specialty media in the proper tray.
- Confirm that the wheel on tray 1 is set to the paper size loaded in the tray. Make sure this size is the size you are trying to print.
- Touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
- Check length and width guides of the tray and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
- Make sure the Print Properties or Print dialog settings have the correct paper size and type.
- Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.
- Cancel the print job.
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.
- To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit the menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Ready appears, enable Resource Save.
• Install additional memory.
37 Insufficient memory to collate job
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.
- Cancel the current print job.
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
- Delete fonts, macros, and other data in printer memory.
•Install additional printer memory.
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored
The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
38 Memory full
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to clear the message.
- Cancel the current print job.
•Install additional printer memory.
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
- Cancel the current print job.
•Install additional printer memory.
40 [color] invalid refill, change cartridge
Replace the specified cartridge to continue printing.
51 Defective flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
- Cancel the current print job.
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.
- Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
- Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.
53 Unformatted flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
- Format the flash memory. If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacing.
54 Network [x] software error
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to continue printing.
- Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
- Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer.
54 Serial option [x] error
Try one or more of the following:
- Check that the serial cable is connected properly and is the correct one for the serial port.
- Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer and on the host computer.
- Touch Continue to continue printing.
- Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer.
54 Standard network software error
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to continue printing.
- Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
- Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.
55 Unsupported option in slot [x]
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
56 Parallel port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port. - Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Serial port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the serial port. - Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
56 Standard USB port disabled
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port. - Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Standard parallel port disabled
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port. - Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 USB port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
- Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored
Something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs. Possible changes include:
•The printer firmware has been updated.
- Paper input options needed for the print job were removed.
- The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the USB port.
- The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
58 Too many bins attached
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the additional bins.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many disks installed
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the excess disks.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many flash options installed
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the excess flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many trays attached
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the additional trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Input config error
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Check if all tray configurations are correct. Remove unnecessary trays if needed.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
59 Incompatible output bin [x]
Try one or more of the following:
- Remove the specified output bin.
- Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified output bin.
61 Remove defective disk
Try one or more of the following:
- Remove the defective printer hard disk.
• Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.
62 Disk full
Try one or more of the following:
- Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
- Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
80.xx Fuser near life warning
1 Order a replacement fuser immediately.
2 When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
80.xx Fuser life warning
- Order a replacement fuser immediately. When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
- Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
80.xx Replace fuser
Replace the fuser using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
80.xx Fuser missing
1 Replace the fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
82.xx Replace waste toner bottle
1 Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on replacing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
82.xx Waste toner bottle missing
Reinsert the waste toner bottle into the printer.
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full
Order a replacement waste toner bottle immediately.
1 Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
83.xx Replace transfer module
Replace the transfer module, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
83.xx Transfer module life warning
1 Replace the transfer module, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
83.xx Transfer module missing
Insert the transfer module into the printer.
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low
Order a replacement for the specified print cartridge.
88.xx [color] cartridge low
1 Remove the specified cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Notes:
- Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded. When the print remains faded, replace the cartridge.
- Have a new cartridge available when the current one no longer prints satisfactorily.
88.xx [Color] cartridge very low
The specified print cartridge is very low.
1 For instructions on replacing a print cartridge, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low
The specified print cartridge is critically low.
1 For instructions on replacing a print cartridge, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
840.01 Scanner disabled by admin
Print without the scanner or contact your system support person.
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists.
The printer identified a problem with the scanner and automatically disabled it. Try one or more of the following:
1 Remove all pages from the ADF.
2 Turn the printer off.
3 Wait for 15 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
Note: If turning the printer off and then on again does not clear the message, then touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
4 Place the document in the ADF, and then adjust the paper guides.
5 From the home screen, touch Copy, or use the keypad to enter the number of copies.
6 Change the copy settings as needed.
7 Touch Copy It.
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option
The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware card.
To fix this, download the correct download emulator version from the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.
Solving printing problems
Multiple-language PDF files do not print
The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts.
1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
2 Click the printer icon > Advanced > Print as image > OK > OK.
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds
The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
If Ready does not appear, then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.
Error message about reading USB drive appears
Make sure the flash drive is supported.
Print jobs do not print
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PROBLEM WITH YOUR PRINTER
From the printer control panel, check the status. If necessary, follow the recovery instructions.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT
Make sure Ready appears on the display before sending a print job.
CHECK IF A SUPPLY IS MISSING OR NEEDS REPLACEMENT
Remove and then reinstall or replace the supply.
CHECK IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL
Remove the paper stack from the standard exit bin.
CHECK IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.
MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED
- Verify that you are using the correct printer software.
- If the printer is connected to your computer through a USB port, then make sure you are running a supported operating system and using a compatible printer software.
MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS WORKING PROPERLY
- Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.
- Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected, then check the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support person to make sure the network is functioning correctly.
The printer software is available on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB, SERIAL, OR ETHERNET CABLE
For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
PARTIAL JOB, NO JOB, OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
- Delete the print job, and then print it again.
- For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one.
- For Windows users, open Print Properties. From the Print and Hold dialog, select the "Keep duplicate documents" check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number.
- For Macintosh users, save each print job, naming each job differently, and then send the individual jobs to the printer.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.
Print job takes longer than expected
Try one or more of the following:
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print job.
TURN OFF THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING
From the home screen, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off >
CHANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS
When using Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode settings, you may notice a reduction in performance.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
- For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Incorrect characters print
- Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode. If Ready Hex appears on the display, you must exit Hex Trace mode before you can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.
- Make sure the SmartSwitch settings are set to On in the Network and USB menus.
Tray linking does not work
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER
- Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.
- Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.
USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS
- Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.
- If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: The standard 550-sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Large jobs do not collate
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON
From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the job.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY
Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.
Unexpected page breaks occur
INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
2 Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeout until the desired value appears.
3 Touch Submit.
Solving copy problems
Copier does not respond
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
Scanner unit does not close
Make sure there are no obstructions:
1 Lift the scanner unit.
2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
3 Lower the scanner unit.
Poor copy quality
These are some examples of poor copy quality:
- Blank pages
- Checkerboard pattern
•Distorted graphics or pictures - Missing characters
- Faded print
Dark print - Skewed lines
•Smudges
•Streaks
•Unexpected characters - White lines in print
Try one or more of the following:
CLEAR ANY ERROR MESSAGES
Check the display and clear any error messages.
REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
When the print remains faded, replace the toner or print cartridge.
CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS
The scanner glass may be dirty. Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
For more information, see "Cleaning the scanner glass" on page 241.
ADJUST THE TONER DARKNESS OF THE COPY
Adjust the toner darkness from the Copy menus.
Check the quality of the original document.
PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT PROPERLY
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
MAKE SURE TO USE THE APPROPRIATE COPY SETTINGS
When patterns (moiré) appear in the output:
- On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being scanned.
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > lower the Sharpness setting
- On the Copy screen, make sure no scaling is being selected.
When the text is light or disappearing:
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Content > Text > √ > select the appropriate source for the original document being copied > √
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > increase the current setting
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal, and then reduce the current setting
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Contrast > increase the current setting
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting
When the output appears washed out or overexposed:
- On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being scanned.
- From the Copy screen, adjust the Darkness setting.
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting
•From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal > reduce the current setting
Partial document or photo copies
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
- For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Solving scanner problems
Checking an unresponsive scanner
If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:
•The printer is turned on.
- The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network device.
- The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
•The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
- The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
- Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem with the scanner.
Scan was not successful
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM
Turn off and then restart the computer.
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING
Close all programs not being used.
THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH
Select a lower scan resolution.
Poor scanned image quality
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water. For more information, see “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 241.
ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Partial document or photo scans
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
- For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Cannot scan from a computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Solving fax problems
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax and e-mail. To set up fax and e-mail, follow these steps:
Note: Before completing these instructions for a printer on a network, make sure the fax cables are connected.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes > Submit
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn it back on.
3 From the printer control panel, touch your language.
4 Touch your country or region, and then touch Continue.
5 Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
6 Touch Fax and E-mail to clear the icons, and then touch Continue.
Note: You can use these same steps to disable fax and e-mail.
Caller ID is not shown
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company to determine which pattern or switch setting to use.
Cannot send or receive a fax
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.
CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:
•Telephone
-Handset
- Answering machine
CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK
1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.
- If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN provider.
- If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL provider.
- If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE
- Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly.
- If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending a fax.
- If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.
TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.
CHECK FOR JAMS
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Ready appears.
TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.
VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice Mail and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL
1 Dial the fax number.
2 Scan the original document one page at a time.
Can send but not receive faxes
Try one or more of the following:
LOAD PAPER
If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS
The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone rings before the printer answers. If you have extension phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then keep the Ring Delay setting at 4.
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Rings to Answer field, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers.
4 Click Submit.
REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the toner or print cartridge.
Can receive but not send faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE
On the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode.
THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY
- Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.
- As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.
Received fax has poor print quality
Try one or more of the following:
RESEND THE DOCUMENT
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
- Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
- Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.
- Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
REPLACE THE CARTRIDGE
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the prints appear faded, replace the cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Max Speed box, click one of the following:
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
4 Click Submit.
Solving home screen applications problems
An application error has occurred
CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS
1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:
- View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings or Configuration.
3 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > System tab > Log.
4 From the Filter menu, select an application status.
5 From the Application menu, select an application, and then click Submit.
MAKE SURE THE FILE NAME YOU WANT TO SCAN TO IS NOT ALREADY IN USE
Verify that the file to which you want to scan is not open by another application or user.
To help prevent errors, make sure either “Append time stamp” or “Overwrite existing file” is selected in the destination configuration settings.
ADJUST THE SCAN SETTINGS
In the destination configuration settings, lower the scan settings. For example, lower the scan resolution, disable Color, or change the Content type to Text.
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If you still cannot isolate the problem, then contact customer support.
Solving option problems
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed
Try one or more of the following:
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER
1 Turn the printer off using the power switch.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option, or go to www.lexmark.com to view the option instruction sheet.
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED
From the computer you are printing from, select the option.
For more information, see "Updating available options in the printer driver" on page 57.
Paper tray problems
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY
1 Open the paper tray.
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3 Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray, then it may not be properly installed. Reinstall the paper tray. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the paper tray, or go to http://support.lexmark.com to view the paper tray instruction sheet.
2,000-sheet drawer problems
CHECK THE DRAWER CONNECTION
Make sure the 2,000-sheet drawer is properly connected to the printer.
LOAD PAPER
If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder
CLEAR ANY JAMS
Open the side door of the tray or feeder, and then remove any jammed paper.
AVOID PAPER JAMS
- Flex the paper.
- Make sure the drawer is properly installed.
•Make sure paper is loaded correctly. - Make sure the paper stack you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray.
- Make sure the paper or specialty media meets specifications and is not damaged.
- Make sure the guides are positioned correctly for the paper size loaded.
Cannot detect flash memory card
Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Cannot detect printer hard disk
Make sure the printer hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE INTERNAL SOLUTIONS PORT (ISP) CONNECTIONS
Make sure the ISP is securely connected to the printer system board.
CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected to the Internal Solutions (ISP) port.
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For information on installing the network printing software, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD.
Internal print server does not operate correctly
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS
- Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board.
- Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For more information on installing the network printing software, do the following:
1 Open the Software and Documentation CD.
2 Click Additional.
3 Under Publications on this CD, select Networking Guide.
Memory card
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
CHECK THE USB/PARALLEL INTERFACE CARD CONNECTION
Make sure the USB/parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board.
CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
Solving paper feed problems
Paper frequently jams
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty media guidelines.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY
Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the multipurpose feeder.
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
- Load paper from a fresh package.
- Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
CHECK THE PAPER PATH
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.
Jammed pages are not reprinted
TURN ON JAM RECOVERY
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
2 Touch the arrows next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears.
3 Touch Submit.
Solving print quality problems
If these suggestions do not correct the problem, then contact customer support. You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement.
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
text_image
ABC DEFIf you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the software program.
Clipped images
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE GUIDES
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
- For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages
You may notice fine, horizontal lines in photographs or pages with a high concentration of color. This can occur when the printer is in Quiet Mode. To fix this, set Quiet Mode to Off (Image/Photo).
Shadow images appear on prints
natural_image
Generic document icon with a black rectangle and gray fill, no text or symbols present.Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
- For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four print cartridges or whichever color has the shadow images.
1 Remove the print cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the print cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, replace the print cartridge of the color that is giving a shadow.
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.
Gray background on prints
text_image
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDECHECK THE BACKGROUND DARKNESS OR REMOVAL SETTING
Try one or more of the following:
- Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting.
- Increase the background removal setting.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN OR DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective print cartridge.
Incorrect margins
text_image
ABCD ABCD ABCDThese are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
- For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints
text_image
ABCDE ABCDE
text_image
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDETry one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective print cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective transfer belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
Paper curl
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
- For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Print irregularities
text_image
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDETry one or more of the following:
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
- For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective print cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective transfer belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
Print is too dark
text_image
ABC DEFTry one or more of the following:
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
- From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
- For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective print cartridge.
Print is too light
text_image
ABC DEFTry one or more of the following:
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
- From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
- For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.
MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print cartridge.
1 Remove the print cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the print cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the print cartridge.
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective print cartridge.
Printer is printing blank pages
natural_image
Blank document page with a corner bookmark (no text or symbols)Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four cartridges:
1 Remove the cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing.
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.
Repeating defects appear on prints
Try one or more of the following:
REPLACE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the print cartridge of the color with the repeating defect, if the print defects occur in the following instances:
•in every 37.7 mm (1.48 in.) of the page
•in every 41.6 mm (1.64 in.) of the page
•in every 42.7 mm (1.68 in.) of the page
•in every 94.3 mm (3.71 in.) of the page
REPLACE THE FUSER
Replace the fuser if print defects occur in the following instances:
•in every 95.0 mm (3.74 in.) of the page
•in every 146.7 mm (5.78 in.) of the page
Skewed print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the length and width guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
•Make sure the guides are not too far from the paper stack.
- Make sure the guides are not pressing too lightly against the paper stack.
CHECK THE PAPER
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.
Solid color or black pages appear on prints
natural_image
Solid dark gray document page with a white corner detail (no text or symbols)MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY, ARE NOT DEFECTIVE AND NOT LOW ON TONER
- Remove the print cartridges.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.
•Reinsert the print cartridges.
Note: If the quality does not improve, replace the print cartridges.
- If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.
Black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper
text_image
ABC DEF
text_image
A.B.C [ ]EFTry one or more of the following:
ENSURE THAT THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT
If the fill pattern is incorrect, choose a different fill pattern from your software program.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE
- Use only the recommended transparencies.
- Ensure that the Paper Type setting matches what is loaded in the tray or feeder.
- Ensure that the Paper Texture setting is correct for the type of paper or specialty media loaded in the tray or feeder.
MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print cartridge:
1 Remove the print cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the print cartridge.
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
text_image
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDETry one or more of the following:
SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER
- From the printer control panel Paper Menu, select Default Source.
- For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn, defective, or empty print cartridge.
Streaked vertical lines
text_image
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDEThese are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE TONER IS SMEARED
Select another tray or feeder to feed paper for the job:
- From the printer control panel, select the Default Source from the Paper Menu.
- For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop-up menus.
A TONER CARTRIDGE IS DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective toner cartridge.
THE TRANSFER MODULE IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the transfer module.
Toner fog or background shading appears on a page
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE PRINT CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY AND ARE NOT DEFECTIVE
Reinstall or replace the print cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the transfer belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Clean any visible toner from the paper path. If the problem persists, then contact customer support.
RECALIBRATE THE PRINTER
Perform color adjust from the printer control panel Quality menu.
CHECK THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM OR APPLICATION
The software program or application may have specified an off-white background.
Toner rubs off
text_image
ABC DEFThese are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.
CHECK THE PAPER WEIGHT AND PAPER TEXTURE SETTINGS
Change the Paper Weight from Normal to Heavy. If necessary, change the Paper Texture from Normal to Rough in the printer control panel Paper menu.
THE FUSER IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the fuser.
Toner specks
text_image
ABC DEFThese are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE TONER CARTRIDGES ARE WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective or worn cartridges.
THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact Customer Support.
Transparency print quality is poor
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES
Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
- For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
- For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Uneven print density
text_image
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDEMAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE OR WORN PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective print cartridge.
Solving color quality problems
FAQ about color printing
What is RGB color?
Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors create colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue needed to produce a certain color.
What is CMYK color?
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses, inkjet printers, and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.
How is color specified in a document to be printed?
Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they allow users to modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the software program Help topics.
How does the printer know what color to print?
When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the desired color. The object information determines the application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.
Why doesn't the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen?
The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, there are many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions. For recommendations on how the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color-matching problems, see the question, "How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?"
The printed page appears tinted. Can I adjust the color?
Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted (for example, everything printed seems to be too red). This can be caused by environmental conditions, paper type, lighting conditions, or user preference. In these instances, adjust the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color. Color Balance provides the user with the ability to make subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane. Selecting positive or negative values for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (from the Color Balance menu) will slightly increase or decrease the amount of toner used for the chosen color. For example, if a printed page has a red tint, then decreasing both magenta and yellow could potentially improve the color balance.
My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected. Is there anything I can do to improve the color?
This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended. If a reflective projector must be used, then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1, 2, or 3 will lighten the transparency. Make sure to print on the recommended type of color transparencies.
What is manual color correction?
When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user-selected color conversion tables to process objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user-defined color conversion will be implemented. Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).
Notes:
- Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating system controls the adjustment of colors.
- The color conversion tables—applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto—generate preferred colors for the majority of documents.
To manually apply a different color conversion table:
1 From the Quality menu, select Color Correction, and then select Manual.
2 From the Quality menu, select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the affected object type.
Manual Color menu
| Object type Color conversion tables | |
| RGB ImageRGB TextRGB Graphics | Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be applied to all incoming color formats.sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor. Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs.Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates the colors displayed on a computer monitor. Uses only black toner to create all levels of neutral gray.sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB Display color correction. Black usage is optimized for printing business graphics.Off—No color correction is implemented. |
| CMYK ImageCMYK TextCMYK Graphics | US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP (Specifications for Web Offset Publishing) color output.Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color output.Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color correction setting.Off—No color correction is implemented. |
How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?
From the printer Quality menu, nine types of Color Samples sets are available. These are also available from the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a multiple-page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box, depending on the table selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table.
By examining Color Samples sets, a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color. The color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program. For more information, see the software program Help topics. Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the selected color conversion table for the particular object.
Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color-matching problem depends on the Color Correction setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual), the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations). When the printer Color Correction setting is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information; and no color conversion is implemented.
Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. The resulting printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.
What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them?
Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer. A detailed Color Samples set contains a range of shades (displayed as colored boxes) that are similar to a user-defined RGB or CMYK value. The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment box.
To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server:
1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:
- View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
- Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Configuration > Color Samples > Detailed Options.
3 Select a color conversion table.
4 Enter the RGB or CMYK color number.
5 Enter an increment value from 1–255.
Note: The closer the value is to 1, the narrower the color sample range will appear.
6 Click Print.
Embedded Web Server does not open
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION
Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.
CHECK THE ADDRESS ENTERED IN THE WEB BROWSER
- Depending on the network settings, you may need to type "https://" instead of "http://" before the printer IP address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, contact your system support person.
•Make sure printer IP address is correct.
TEMPORARILY DISABLE WEB PROXY SERVERS
Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server. For more information, contact your system support person.
Contacting customer support
When you call customer support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark X792de, X792dte, X792dtfe, X792dtpe, X792dtme, X792dtse
Machine type:
7562, 4917
Model(s):
432, 436, dn1, dn2, gd1, gd2, dt1, dt2, gt1, gt2, df1, df2, gf1, gf2, d01, d02, g01, g02, t01, t02, g91, g92, f01, f02, g81, g82
Edition notice
September 2011
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user's responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
If you don't have access to the Internet, you can contact Lexmark by mail:
Lexmark International, Inc.
Bldg 004-2/CSC
740 New Circle Road NW
Lexington, KY 40550
USA
© 2010 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense.
Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries.
PrintCryption and ScanBack are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company's designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
| Albertus The Monotype | Corporation plc |
| Antique Olive Monsieur | Marcel OLIVE |
| Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc. | |
| Arial The Monotype Corporation plc | |
| CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of Agfa Corporation | |
| Chicago Apple Computer, Inc. | |
| Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries | |
| Eurostile Nebiolo | |
| Geneva Apple Computer, Inc. | |
| GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc | |
| Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries | |
| Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry | |
| ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation | |
| ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation | |
| ITC Mona Lisa | International Typeface Corporation |
| ITC Zapf Chancery | International Typeface Corporation |
| Joanna | The Monotype Corporation plc |
| Marigold | Arthur Baker |
| Monaco | Apple Computer, Inc. |
| New York | Apple Computer, Inc. |
| Oxford | Arthur Baker |
| Palatino Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries |
| Stempel Garamond Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries |
| Taffy Agfa Corporation |
| Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc |
| Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries |
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
text_image
AirPrintAirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC regulations.
Modular component notice
This product contains the following modular component(s):
Lexmark regulatory type/model LEX-M01-003; FCC ID: IYLM01003; IC: 2376A-M01003
Licensing notices
The following documents can be viewed from the installation software CD.
| Directory File | |
| CD:\LEGAL FW_License.pdf | mDNS.tar.gzExpat.txtInst_lib.txtInstgui.txtInstgui.zip |
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
| 1-meter average sound pressure, dBA | |
| Printing 53 dBA | |
| Ready 35 dBA | |
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
text_image
Prohibition sign with red X marks crossed over a trash bin, indicating no waste or dischargeThe WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products. If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local sales office phone number.
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the metal frame of the printer.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.
Temperature information
| Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F) | |
| Shipping and storage temperature -40° to 40°C (104°F) |
Laser notice
This product contains a Class I (1) laser producing invisible laser radiation. The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) AlGaAs dual beam laser enclosed in a non-serviceable printhead assembly operating in the wavelength of 775-800 nanometers. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation exceeding Class I levels during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
text_image
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam. Perigo - Emissio invisível de laser quando os cartuchos são removidos e a trava aberta. Evite exposição ao feixe, Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima. Pozor Nebezpeči vyskytu neviditelného laserového záření při odstranění kazet a odblokovaný pojistky. Nevystavujele se paprskům Fare - Uysinlig laserstráling, når tonerkassetterne fjernes og aflásning ophaves. Undgá at komme i kontak med stralen. Pas opl - Onzichtbare laserstraling als cartridges worden verwijderd en vergrendeling open is. Voorkom blootstelling aan de stralen. Danger - Radiations invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser. Vaara - Näkymióntä laserasátelyš on varottava, kun várikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä säteelle altistumista. Gefahr - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden! Kibňovac - Ádopatı aktivelbála Múda čtovn apopósivnion na kaateské és kevdeudetávićený n évaopósukka. Atoplyceta pyr úklicki otni štenu aktrubov. Figyelem! A kazetták kivételekor láthatatlan lézersugárzás léphet fel, ha a biztonsági kapcsoló nem működik. Kerüljük el a lézersugarat. Pericolo - Emissione di radiazioni laser durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l'esposizione al raggi Fare - Uysinlig laserstrálking när kassetter tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngá eksponering. Niebezpieczeństwo - niewidoczne promieniowanie laserowe po wyjściu kasety i wyłączeniu blokady. Unikać ekspozyrcji na wiązkę. Onacho! При ниятых картридках и нарушении фиксации невидимке газу лазерное излучение! . Изberайте воздействия луча. Pozor - Nebezpečenstvo neviditelného laserového žarenia pri odobratých kazetá ch a odblokované polstke. Nevystavujele sa túlčom. Peligro: Se producen radiaciones laser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloque desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de laser. Varning - Osynlig laserstrálning när kassetterna är borttagna och spärren avaktiverad. Undvik att utsätta dig för strålen. 危険 - 当鼓粉盒被取出并且互锁失去作用时有看不见的激光感射. 请避免暴露在激光光束下. 危険 - 移除碳粉便與安全遮鎖開關失效時會產生着不見的雷射顯射. 請避免曝露在雷射光束下. 危険: カートリッジが取外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光を放射します。光線に当らないようにして下さい。Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
| Mode Description Power consumption | (Watts) | |
| Printing | The product is generating hard-copy output from electronic inputs. | 1000 W |
| Copy | The product is generating hard-copy output from hard-copy original documents. | 1050 W |
| Scan The product is scanning hard-copy documents. 115 W | ||
| Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 70 W | ||
| Sleep Mode | The product is in a high-level energy-saving mode. | 17 W |
| Hibernate | The product is in a low-level energy-saving mode. | 0.75 W |
| Off The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned off. 0 W | ||
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes):
30
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.
Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard ICES-003.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Radio interference notice
Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises' wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc. at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance to Telecom's specifications:
- There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and
- The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt.
- The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
South Africa telecommunications notice
This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN.
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The Lexmark filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines in Switzerland.
Notice to Users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.
Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.
Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters, for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.
Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited per regulations of Industry Canada.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Industry Canada (Canada)
Notice to users in the European Union
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC and 2005/32/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and the ecodesign of energy-using products.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
| AT BE BG CH | CY CZ DE DK | EE | ||||||
| EL ES FI FR HR | HU IE IS IT | |||||||
| LI LT LU LV MT | NL NO | PL PT | ||||||
| RO | SE SI SK TR UK |
| Česky | Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES. |
| Dansk | Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. |
| Deutsch Hier | mit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet. |
| Ελληνική | ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η ΛΕΧΜΑΡΚ ΙΝΤΕΝΤΑΙΛ, ΙΝΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ. |
| English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. | |
| Español Por | medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. |
| Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele. | |
| Suomi | Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen. |
| Français Par | la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. |
| Magyar Alulirott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb előírásainak. | |
| Íslenska Hér meõ lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC. | |
| Italiano Con | la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. |
| Latviski | Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem. |
| Lietuvių | Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas. |
| Malti | Bil-preženti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE. |
| Nederlands | Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. |
| Norsk | Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. |
| Polski | Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. |
| Português | A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE. |
| Slovensky | Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spíňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES. |
| Slovensko | Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES. |
| Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG. | |
Statement of Limited Warranty
Lexmark X792de, X792dte, X792dtfe, X792dtpe, X792dtme, X792dtse
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location. You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web at http://support.lexmark.com.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user's guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
LEXMARK SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT: BY USING THIS PRODUCT, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND LICENSE AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRODUCT UNUSED AND REQUEST A REFUND OF THE AMOUNT YOU PAID. IF YOU ARE INSTALLING THIS PRODUCT FOR USE BY OTHER PARTIES, YOU AGREE TO INFORM THE USERS THAT USE OF THE PRODUCT INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS.
LEXMARK SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
This License Agreement (“Software License Agreement”) is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Lexmark International, Inc. (“Lexmark”) that, to the extent your Lexmark product or Software Program is not otherwise subject to a written software license agreement between you and Lexmark or its suppliers, governs your use of any Software Program installed on or provided by Lexmark for use in connection with your Lexmark product. The term “Software Program” includes machine-readable instructions, audio/visual content (such as images and recordings), and associated media, printed materials and electronic documentation, whether incorporated into, distributed with or for use with your Lexmark product.
1 STATEMENT OF SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY. Lexmark warrants that the media (e.g., diskette or compact disk) on which the Software Program (if any) is furnished is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period. The warranty period is ninety (90) days and commences on the date the Software Program is delivered to the original end-user. This limited warranty applies only to Software Program media purchased new from Lexmark or an Authorized Lexmark Reseller or Distributor. Lexmark will replace the Software Program should it be determined that the media does not conform to this limited warranty.
2 DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, LEXMARK AND ITS SUPPLIERS PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM "AS IS" AND HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ABSENCE OF VIRUSES, ALL WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM. TO THE EXTENT LEXMARK CANNOT BY LAW DISCLAIM ANY COMPONENT OF THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, LEXMARK LIMITS THE DURATION OF SUCH WARRANTIES TO THE 90-DAY TERM OF THE EXPRESS SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY.
This Agreement is to be read in conjunction with certain statutory provisions, as that may be in force from time to time, that imply warranties or conditions or impose obligations on Lexmark that cannot be excluded or modified. If any such provisions apply, then to the extent Lexmark is able, Lexmark hereby limits its liability for breach of those provisions to one of the following: providing you a replacement copy of the Software Program or reimbursement of the price paid for the Software Program.
The Software Program may include internet links to other software applications and/or internet web pages hosted and operated by third parties unaffiliated with Lexmark. You acknowledge and agree that Lexmark is not responsible in any way for the hosting, performance, operation, maintenance, or content of, such software applications and/or internet web pages.
3 LIMITATION OF REMEDY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY AND ALL LIABILITY OF LEXMARK UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE GREATER OF THE PRICE PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM AND FIVE U.S. DOLLARS (OR THE EQUIVALENT IN LOCAL CURRENCY). YOUR SOLE REMEDY AGAINST LEXMARK IN ANY DISPUTE UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE TO SEEK TO RECOVER ONE OF THESE AMOUNTS, UPON PAYMENT OF WHICH LEXMARK SHALL BE RELEASED AND DISCHARGED OF ALL FURTHER OBLIGATIONS AND LIABILITY TO YOU.
IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK, ITS SUPPLIERS, SUBSIDIARIES, OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES, LOST SAVINGS, INTERRUPTION OF USE OR ANY LOSS OF, INACCURACY IN, OR DAMAGE TO, DATA
OR RECORDS, FOR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, OR DAMAGE TO REAL OR TANGIBLE PROPERTY, FOR LOSS OF PRIVACY ARISING OUT OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM, OR OTHERWISE IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT), REGARDLESS OF THE NATURE OF THE CLAIM, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY), AND EVEN IF LEXMARK, OR ITS SUPPLIERS, AFFILIATES, OR REMARKETERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY YOU BASED ON A THIRD-PARTY CLAIM, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THIS EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES IS DETERMINED LEGALLY INVALID. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE-STATED REMEDIES FAIL OF THEIR ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
4 U.S.A. STATE LAWS. This Software Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state. Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts or the exclusion of limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.
5 LICENSE GRANT. Lexmark grants you the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this License Agreement:
a Use. You may Use one (1) copy of the Software Program. The term "Use" means storing, loading, installing, executing, or displaying the Software Program. If Lexmark has licensed the Software Program to you for concurrent use, you must limit the number of authorized users to the number specified in your agreement with Lexmark. You may not separate the components of the Software Program for use on more than one computer. You agree that you will not Use the Software Program, in whole or in part, in any manner that has the effect of overriding, modifying, eliminating, obscuring, altering or de-emphasizing the visual appearance of any trademark, trade name, trade dress or intellectual property notice that appears on any computer display screens normally generated by, or as a result of, the Software Program.
b Copying. You may make one (1) copy of the Software Program solely for purposes of backup, archiving, or installation, provided the copy contains all of the original Software Program's proprietary notices. You may not copy the Software Program to any public or distributed network.
c Reservation of Rights. The Software Program, including all fonts, is copyrighted and owned by Lexmark International, Inc. and/or its suppliers. Lexmark reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this License Agreement.
d Freeware. Notwithstanding the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, all or any portion of the Software Program that constitutes software provided under public license by third parties ("Freeware") is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the software license agreement accompanying such Freeware, whether in the form of a discrete agreement, shrink-wrap license, or electronic license terms at the time of download. Use of the Freeware by you shall be governed entirely by the terms and conditions of such license.
6 TRANSFER. You may transfer the Software Program to another end-user. Any transfer must include all software components, media, printed materials, and this License Agreement and you may not retain copies of the Software Program or components thereof. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end-user receiving the transferred Software Program must agree to all these License Agreement terms. Upon transfer of the Software Program, your license is automatically terminated. You may not rent, sublicense, or assign the Software Program except to the extent provided in this License Agreement, and any attempt to do so shall be void.
7 UPGRADES. To Use a Software Program identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed to the original Software Program identified by Lexmark as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the original Software Program that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility.
8 LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not alter, decrypt, reverse engineer, reverse assemble, reverse compile or otherwise translate the Software Program, except as and to the extent expressly permitted to do so by applicable law for the purposes of inter-operability, error correction, and security testing. If you have such statutory rights, you will notify Lexmark in writing of any intended reverse engineering, reverse assembly, or reverse compilation. You may not decrypt the Software Program unless necessary for the legitimate Use of the Software Program.
9 ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE. This License Agreement applies to updates or supplements to the original Software Program provided by Lexmark unless Lexmark provides other terms along with the update or supplement.
10 TERM. This License Agreement is effective unless terminated or rejected. You may reject or terminate this license at any time by destroying all copies of the Software Program, together with all modifications, documentation, and merged portions in any form, or as otherwise described herein. Lexmark may terminate your license upon notice if you fail to comply with any of the terms of this License Agreement. Upon such termination, you agree to destroy all copies of the Software Program together with all modifications, documentation, and merged portions in any form.
11 TAXES. You agree that you are responsible for payment of any taxes including, without limitation, any goods and services and personal property taxes, resulting from this Agreement or your Use of the Software Program.
12 LIMITATION ON ACTIONS. No action, regardless of form, arising out of this Agreement may be brought by either party more than two years after the cause of action has arisen, except as provided under applicable law.
13 APPLICABLE LAW. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Kentucky, United States of America. No choice of law rules in any jurisdiction shall apply. The UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.
14 UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software Program has been developed entirely at private expense. Rights of the United States Government to use the Software Program is as set forth in this Agreement and as restricted in DFARS 252.227-7014 and in similar FAR provisions (or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause).
15 CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Lexmark, its affiliates, and agents may collect and use information you provide in relation to support services performed with respect to the Software Program and requested by you. Lexmark agrees not to use this information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to provide such services.
16 EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You may not (a) acquire, ship, transfer, or reexport, directly or indirectly, the Software Program or any direct product therefrom, in violation of any applicable export laws or (b) permit the Software Program to be used for any purpose prohibited by such export laws, including, without limitation, nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation.
17 AGREEMENT TO CONTRACT ELECTRONICALLY. You and Lexmark agree to form this License Agreement electronically. This means that when you click the "Agree" or "Yes" button on this page or use this product, you acknowledge your agreement to these License Agreement terms and conditions and that you are doing so with the intent to "sign" a contract with Lexmark.
18 CAPACITY AND AUTHORITY TO CONTRACT. You represent that you are of the legal age of majority in the place you sign this License Agreement and, if applicable, you are duly authorized by your employer or principal to enter into this contract.
19 ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This License Agreement (including any addendum or amendment to this License Agreement that is included with the Software Program) is the entire agreement between you and Lexmark relating to the Software Program. Except as otherwise provided for herein, these terms and conditions supersede all prior or contemporaneous oral or written communications, proposals, and representations with respect to the Software Program or any other subject matter covered by this License Agreement (except to the extent such extraneous terms do not conflict with the terms of this License Agreement, any other written agreement signed by you and Lexmark relating to your Use of the Software Program). To the extent any Lexmark policies or programs for support services conflict with the terms of this License Agreement, the terms of this License Agreement shall control.
MICROSOFT CORPORATION NOTICES
1 This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369.
2 This product is based on Microsoft Print Schema technology. You may find the terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=83288.
ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED NOTICE
Contains Flash ^® , Flash ^® Lite ^™ and/or Reader ^® technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated
This Product contains Adobe® Flash® player software under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated, Copyright © 1995-2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC. All rights reserved. Adobe, Reader and Flash are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Index
Numerics
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option 286
2,000-sheet high-capacity feeder installing 53
200 paper jam 259
2000-sheet high-capacity feeder loading 78
201 paper jam 259
202–203 paper jams 260
230 paper jam 261
231–239 paper jams 262
24x paper jam 262
250 paper jam 263
280–289 paper jam 264
290–292 paper jams 265
31.xx Missing or Defective [color] cartridge 278
32.xx [color] cartridge part number unsupported by device 278
34 Incorrect paper size, open [src] 278
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 278
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation 279
37 Insufficient memory to collate job 279
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted 279
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored 279
38 Memory full 279
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed 279
40 [color] invalid refill, change cartridge 279
400–403 paper jams 265
431-438 paper jams 266
455 staple jam 266
460–461 paper jams 265
51 Defective flash detected 280
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 280
53 Unformatted flash detected 280
54 Network [x] software error 280
54 Serial option [x] error 280
54 Standard network software error 280
55 Unsupported option in slot [x] 281
550-sheet tray installing 53
550-sheet tray (standard or optional) loading 75
56 Parallel port [x] disabled 281
56 Serial port [x] disabled 281
56 Standard parallel port disabled 281
56 Standard USB port disabled 281
56 USB port [x] disabled 281
57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored 282
58 Input config error 283
58 Too many bins attached 282
58 Too many disks installed 282
58 Too many flash options installed 282
58 Too many trays attached 282
59 Incompatible output bin [x] 283
62 Disk full 283
80.xx Fuser life warning 283
80.xx Fuser missing 284
80.xx Fuser near life warning 283
80.xx Replace fuser 284
82.xx Replace waste toner bottle 284
82.xx Waste toner bottle missing 284
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full 284
83.xx Replace transfer module 284
83.xx Transfer module life warning 284
83.xx Transfer module missing 284
840.01 Scanner disabled by admin 285
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. 285
88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low 285
88.xx [color] cartridge low 285
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low 284
A
accessing the system board 35
Active NIC menu 161
adding a date and time stamp 109
ADF
copying using 102
ADF kit
ordering 247
ADF parts
cleaning 242
Adjusting color 269
adjusting copy quality 106
adjusting Sleep Mode 70
adjusting toner darkness 93
advanced options, touch-screen copy 112
fax 133
FTP 140
AppleTalk menu 166
applications list
home screen 29
applications, home screen
Forms and Favorites 29
My MFP 29
Remote Operator Panel 29
Scan to Network 29
WS-Scan 29
assigning a custom paper type name 84
attaching cables 54
attaching the system board
cover 35
available internal options 33
avoiding paper jams 257
B
Bin Setup menu 159
black-and-white copying 104
black-and-white printing 93
blank pages 309
blocking junk faxes 131
buttons, printer control panel 23
buttons, touch screen using 25
C
cables
Ethernet 54
USB 54
calling customer support 318
canceling
print job, from computer 100
canceling a print job
from a computer 100
from the printer control panel 100
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 318
card stock
loading in multipurpose feeder 80 tips 98
Change [paper source] to [custom string] 270
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation] 270
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] 269
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation] 270
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type] 270
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type] load
[orientation] 270
checking an unresponsive
printer 269
checking an unresponsive scanner 292
checking printer status on Embedded Web Server 254
checking printer status using the Embedded Web Server 254
checking status of supplies 245
checking the status of supplies 245
checking the virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 254
checking virtual display using the Embedded Web Server 254
choosing a fax connection 123
cleaning
ADF parts 242
exterior of the printer 240
scanner glass 241
cleaning kit
ordering 247
cleaning the printhead lenses 244
Close [tray] door 271
Close finisher top cover 271
Close paper transport cover 270
Close top access cover 271
collating copies 107
confidential print jobs 98
printing from a Macintosh computer 99
printing from Windows 99
Confidential Print menu 176
configuration information wireless network 57
configurations printer 20
Configure MP menu 151
configuring e-mail settings 114
configuring port settings 65
connecting printer to distinctive ring service 125
connecting the printer to regional adapters 125
conservation settings brightness, adjusting 71
Quiet Mode 69
Sleep Mode 70, 71
standard exit bin lighting 72
conserving supplies 68
contacting customer support 318
control panel, printer 23
copy quality adjusting 106
copy screen
advanced options 112
options 110, 111, 112, 113, 139
Copy Settings menu 188
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 289
partial document or photo copies 291
poor copy quality 290
poor scanned image quality 293
scanner unit does not close 290
copying
adding a date and time stamp 109
adding an overlay message 109
adjusting quality 106
canceling a copy job 109, 110
collating copies 107
custom job (job build) 108
different paper sizes 105
enlarging 106
in black-and-white 104
multiple pages on one sheet 108
on both sides of the paper (duplexing) 105
on letterhead 103
on transparencies 103
photos 103
placing separator sheets between copies 107
quick copy 102
reducing 106
selecting a tray 104
to a different size 104
using the ADF 102
using the scanner glass (flatbed) 103
copying different paper sizes 105
copying multiple pages on one sheet 108
copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing) 105
copying on letterhead 103
copying on transparencies 103
copying photos 103
corrupted printer hard disk 271
creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server 127
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web Server 137
creating profiles
using the ScanBack Utility 142
Custom Bin Names menu 158
custom name configuring
Custom Names menu 157
custom paper type name creating 83
Custom Scan Sizes menu 158
Custom Type [x]
changing name 83
changing paper type 84
Custom Types menu 157
D
date and time, fax setting 126
daylight savings time, faxing 127
Default Source menu 148
different paper sizes, copying 105
directory list printing 100
Disk Wiping menu 176
display troubleshooting display is blank 286
display shows only diamonds 286
display, printer control panel 23 adjusting brightness 71
distinctive ring service, fax connecting to 125
documents, printing from Macintosh 93 from Windows 93
duplexing 105
E
Eco-Mode setting 69
Edit Security Setups menu 174
Embedded Web Server accessing 254
administrator settings 254
checking printer status 254
checking supplies 245
creating a fax destination shortcut 127
creating an FTP shortcut 137
creating e-mail shortcuts 115
functions 254
initial fax setup 122
networking settings 254
problem accessing 318
setting up e-mail alerts 255
using 254
Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide where to find 254
emission
notices 321, 322, 325, 329, 330
Empty the hole punch box 272
encrypting the printer hard disk 239
enlarging a copy 106
envelopes
loading in multipurpose feeder 80 tips on using 97
environmental settings
brightness, adjusting 71
conserving supplies 68
Hibernate Mode 71
Quiet Mode 69
Sleep Mode 70
standard exit bin lighting 72
erasing volatile memory 237
Ethernet networking
Macintosh 62
Windows 62
Ethernet port 54
exit bins
linking 83
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web Server 32
exporting a configuration using the
Embedded Web Server 32
exterior of the printer cleaning 240
canceling 118
e-mail alerts
low supply levels 255
paper jam 255
setting up 255
e-mail function
setting up 114
e-mail screen
advanced options 120
options 118, 119, 120
E-mail Settings menu 205
e-mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web Server 115
e-mail, sending
using a shortcut number 116
using the address book 116
using the touch screen 116
e-mailing
adding message line 117
adding subject line 117
changing output file type 117
configuring e-mail settings 114
creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 115
creating shortcuts using the touch screen 115
setting up e-mail function 114
using a shortcut number 116
using the address book 116
using the touch screen 116
F
factory defaults
restoring 256
FAQ about color printing 315
fax and e-mail functions setting up 294
fax and e-mail functions are not set up 294
fax connection
connecting the printer to the wall jack 123
connecting to a DSL line 124
connecting to a PBX or ISDN 124
fax connections
regional adapters 125
fax log
viewing 131
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 194
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
menu 203
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
system administrator. 272
fax screen
advanced options 133
options 132, 133
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system administrator. 272
Fax Station Name not set up 272
Fax Station Number not set up 272
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 294
can receive but not send faxes 297
can send but not receive faxes 296
cannot send or receive a fax 295
received fax has poor print quality 297
faxing
blocking junk faxes 131
canceling a fax job 131, 132
changing resolution 130
choosing a fax connection 123
configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time 127
creating shortcuts using the Embedded Web Server 12
creating shortcuts using the touch screen 128
distinctive ring service 125
fax setup 122
forwarding faxes 134
holding faxes 134
making a fax lighter or darker 130
sending a fax 128
sending a fax at a scheduled time 130
sending using the touch screen 128
setting the date and time 126
setting the fax number or station number 126
setting the outgoing fax name or station name 126
viewing a fax log 131
FCC notices 321, 325, 329
features
Scan Center 142
fiber optic
network setup 62
finding more information about the printer 18
finisher
finishing features 90
supported paper sizes 90
finisher features 90
Finishing menu 224
firmware card
installing 40
flash drive
printing from 94
Flash Drive menu 215
flash drives
supported file types 96
flash memory card
installing 40
troubleshooting 300
font sample list
printing 100
Forms and Favorites 30
forwarding faxes 134
FTP
scanning using address book 137
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the touch screen 138
FTP screen
advanced options 140
options 138, 139, 140
FTP Settings menu 211
G
General Settings menu 179
Green settings
Eco-Mode 69
Quiet Mode 69
green settings
Hibernate Mode 71
H
held jobs 98
printing from a Macintosh computer 99
printing from Windows 99
Help menu 235
Hibernate Mode
using 71
hiding icons on the home screen 29
holding faxes 134
home screen
applications 29
hiding icons 29
showing icons 29
home screen applications
using 29
home screen buttons and icons
description 24
HTML menu 234
|
Image menu 235
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 32
importing a configuration using the
Embedded Web Server 32
initial fax setup 122
using the Embedded Web
Server 122
Insert hole punch box 273
Insert staple cartridge 273
Install bin [x] 273
Install envelope feeder 273
Install Tray [x] 273
installing a memory card 38
installing an Internal Solutions
Port 42
installing on a wireless network using Windows 58
installing options
order of installation 52
installing printer
on wireless network 58
installing printer hard disk 46
installing printer on a network wired networking 62
installing printer on a wireless network
using Macintosh 60
installing printer software 56 adding options 57
installing the 2,000-sheet
high-capacity feeder 53
installing the 550-sheet tray 53
internal print server troubleshooting 301
Internal Solutions Port
changing port settings 65
installing 42
troubleshooting 300
IPv6 menu 165
J
jams
avoiding 257
locating jam areas 257
locations 257
numbers 257
jams, clearing
200 paper jam 259
201 paper jam 259
202–203 paper jams 260
230 paper jam 261
231–239 paper jams 262
24x paper jam 262
250 paper jam 263
280–289 paper jam 264
280-299 242
290–292 paper jams 265
400–403 paper jams 265
431–438 paper jams 266
455 staple jam 266
460–461 paper jams 265
Job Accounting menu 223
L
labels, paper
tips 97
letterhead
copying on 103
loading, 2000-sheet high-capacity
feeder 78
loading, multipurpose feeder 96
loading, trays 96
letterhead printing 96
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears on
prints 305
light, indicator 23
linking
exit bins 83
linking exit bins 83
linking trays 82
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] 275
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] 275
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] 275
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 275
Load staples 275
loading
2000-sheet high-capacity feeder 78
550-sheet tray (standard or optional) 75
letterhead in 2000-sheet high-capacity feeder 78
letterhead in multipurpose feeder 96
multipurpose feeder 80
loading card stock
in multipurpose feeder 80
loading envelopes
in multipurpose feeder 80
loading the multipurpose feeder 80
loading the standard tray 75
loading transparencies
in multipurpose feeder 80
lock, security 34
M
making copies using paper from
selected tray 104
memory card
installing 38
troubleshooting 301
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 275
menu settings page printing 55
menus
Active NIC 161
AppleTalk 166
Bin Setup 159
Confidential Print 176
Configure MP 151
Copy Settings 188
Custom Bin Names 158
Custom Names 157
Custom Scan Sizes 158
Custom Types 157
Default Source 148
diagram of 145
Disk Wiping 176
Edit Security Setups 174
E-mail Settings 205
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 194
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 203
Finishing 224
Flash Drive 215
FTP Settings 211
General Settings 179
Help 235
HTML 234
Image 235
IPv6 165
Job Accounting 223
Miscellaneous 175
Network [x] 161
Network Card 163
Network Reports 163
Paper Loading 155
Paper Size/Type 148
Paper Texture 152
Paper Weight 154
Parallel [x] 169
PCL Emul 231
PDF 230
PostScript 231
Quality 226
Reports 160
Security Audit Log 177
Serial [x] 171
Set Date/Time 178
Setup 221
SMTP Setup menu 173
Standard Network 161
Standard USB 167
Substitute Size 152
Supplies 146
TCP/IP 164
Utilities 229
Wireless 166
XPS 230
menus diagram 145
Miscellaneous menu 175
moving the printer 252, 253
moving your printer 19
multipurpose feeder loading 80
My MFP 31
N
Network [x] menu 161
Network Card menu 163
network options 33
Network Reports menu 163
network setup page printing 56
Networking Guide
where to find 254
noise emission levels 322
notices 320, 321, 322, 323, 324,
325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330
0
options
2,000-sheet high-capacity feeder, installing 53
550-sheet tray, installing 53
fax card 33
firmware card 40
firmware cards 33
flash memory card 40
Internal Solutions Port, installing 42
memory card, installing 38
memory cards 33
network 33
order of installation 52
ports 33
printer hard disk, installing 46
printer hard disk, removing 51
updating in printer driver 57 options, touch-screen
copy 110, 111, 112, 113, 139
e-mail 118, 119, 120
fax 132, 133
FTP 138, 139, 140
scan 143
scan to computer 143, 144
ordering
cleaning kit 247
print cartridges 246
staple cartridges 247
waste toner bottle 247
ordering a print cartridge 246
output file type
changing 117
P
paper
different sizes, copying 105
letterhead 86
preprinted forms 86
recycled 86
saving 108
selecting 86
storing 88
unacceptable 86
Universal Paper Size 158
Universal size setting 74
using recycled 68
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 302
paper jams
avoiding 257
paper jams, clearing
200 paper jam 259
201 paper jam 259
202–203 paper jams 260
230 paper jam 261
231–239 paper jams 262
24x paper jam 262
250 paper jam 263
280–289 paper jam 264
280-299 242
290–292 paper jams 265
400–403 paper jams 265
431–438 paper jams 266
460–461 paper jams 265
Paper Loading menu 155
paper size
setting 74
Paper Size/Type menu 148
paper sizes
supported by printer 88
Paper Texture menu 152
paper type
setting 74
paper types
duplex support 90
supported by printer 90
where to load 90
Paper Weight menu 154
Parallel [x] menu 169
PCL Emul menu 231
PDF menu 230
photos
copying 103
placing separator sheets between
copies 107
port settings
configuring 65
PostScript menu 231
print cartridge
replacing 248
print cartridges
ordering 246
print irregularities 306
print job
canceling, from computer 100
print quality
cleaning the ADF parts 242
cleaning the printhead lenses 244
cleaning the scanner glass 241
print quality troubleshooting
black streaks on a page 311
blank pages 309
characters have jagged edges 303
clipped images 303
fine horizontal lines 303
gray background on prints 304
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears
on prints 305
poor transparency quality 314
print irregularities 306
print is too dark 307
print is too light 308
repeating print defects 309
shadow images appear on
prints 304
skewed print 310
solid color or black pages appear
on prints 310
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 311
streaked vertical lines 312
toner fog or background
shading 312
toner rubs off 313
toner specks 314
uneven print density 314
white streaks on a page 311
print troubleshooting
error reading flash drive 286
held jobs do not print 287
incorrect characters print 288
incorrect margins 305
jammed pages are not
reprinted 302
job prints from wrong tray 288
job prints on wrong paper 288
jobs do not print 286
Large jobs do not collate 289
multiple-language PDF files do not print 286
paper curl 306
paper frequently jams 302
print job takes longer than expected 288
tray linking does not work 288
unexpected page breaks occur 289
printer
configurations 20
finishing features 90
minimum clearances 19
moving 19, 252, 253
selecting a location 19
shipping 253
printer configurations 20
printer control panel 23
adjusting brightness 71
factory defaults, restoring 256
printer hard disk
encrypting 239
installing 46
removing 51
troubleshooting 300
printer hard disk encryption 239
printer information
where to find 18
printer messages
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option 286
31.xx Missing or Defective [color] cartridge 278
32.xx [color] cartridge part number unsupported by
device 278
34 Incorrect paper size, open [src] 278
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature 278
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment
operation 279
37 Insufficient memory to collate job 279
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted 279
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored 279
38 Memory full 279
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed 279
40 [color] invalid refill, change cartridge 279
51 Defective flash detected 280
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources 280
53 Unformatted flash detected 280
54 Network [x] software error 280
54 Serial option [x] error 280
54 Standard network software error 280
55 Unsupported option in slot [x] 281
56 Parallel port [x] disabled 281
56 Serial port [x] disabled 281
56 Standard parallel port disabled 281
56 Standard USB port disabled 281
56 USB port [x] disabled 281
57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored 282
58 Input config error 283
58 Too many bins attached 282
58 Too many disks installed 282
58 Too many flash options installed 282
58 Too many trays attached 282
59 Incompatible output bin [x] 283
62 Disk full 283
80.xx Fuser life warning 283
80.xx Fuser missing 284
80.xx Fuser near life warning 283
80.xx Replace fuser 284
82.xx Replace waste toner bottle 284
82.xx Waste toner bottle missing 284
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full 284
83.xx Replace transfer module 284
83.xx Transfer module life warning 284
83.xx Transfer module missing 284
840.01 Scanner disabled by admin 285
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. 285
88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low 285
88.xx [color] cartridge low 285
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low 284
Adjusting color 269
an error has occurred with the USB drive 269
Change [paper source] to [custom string] 270
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation] 270
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] 269
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation] 270
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type] 270
Change [paper source] to [paper size] [paper type] load [orientation] 270
Close [tray] door 271
Close finisher top cover 271
Close paper transport cover 270
Close top access cover 271
Disk corrupted 271
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space. 271
Disk problem 271
Empty the hole punch box 272
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator. 272
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator. 272
Fax Station Name not set up 272
Fax Station Number not set up 272
Insert hole punch box 273
Insert staple cartridge 273
Insert Tray [x] 273
Install bin [x] 273
Install envelope feeder 273
Install Tray [x] 273
Load [src] with [custom string] 274
Load [src] with [custom type name] 274
Load [src] with [size] 274
Load [src] with [type] [size] 274
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string] 275
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name] 275
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size] 275
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size] 275
Load staples 275
Memory full, cannot print faxes 275
Reattach bin [x] 276
Reattach bin [x] - [y] 276
Remove packaging material, [area name] 277
Remove paper from all bins 277
Remove paper from bin [x] 277
Remove paper from standard output bin 277
Restore held jobs? 277
Scanner automatic feeder cover open 277
Slide finisher to the left 277
Some held jobs were not restored 277
Supply needed to complete job 277
Tray [x] paper size unsupported 278
Unsupported disk 278
Unsupported USB device, please remove 272
printer options troubleshooting
2,000-sheet drawer problems 300
cannot detect flash memory card 300
cannot detect printer hard disk 300
internal print server 301
Internal Solutions Port 300
memory card 301
option does not work 299
paper tray problems 299
USB/parallel interface card 301
printer problems, solving basic 269
printer software
installing 56
printhead lenses
cleaning 244
printing
black-and-white 93
canceling, from printer control panel 100
directory list 100
font sample list 100
from flash drive 94
from Macintosh 93
from Windows 93
menu settings page 55
network setup page 56
on letterhead 96
printing a directory list 100
printing a document 93
printing a font sample list 100
printing a menu settings page 55
printing a network setup page 56
printing confidential and other held jobs
from a Macintosh computer 99
from Windows 99
printing from a flash drive 94
printing in black and white 93
printing on letterhead 96
publications
where to find 18
Q
Quality menu 226
Quiet Mode
print quality troubleshooting 303
R
Reattach bin [x] 276
Reattach bin [x] - [y] 276
reattaching the system board
cover 35
recycled paper
using 68, 86
recycling
Lexmark packaging 73
Lexmark products 72
toner cartridges 73
WEEE statement 322
reducing a copy 106
reducing printer noise 69
Remote Operator Panel 31
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 277
Remove paper from all bins 277
Remove paper from bin [x] 277
Remove paper from standard
output bin 277
removing printer hard disk 51
repeat print jobs 98
printing from a Macintosh computer 99
printing from Windows 99
repeating print defects 309
replacing a print cartridge 248
replacing the waste toner
bottle 251
reports
viewing 255
Reports menu 160
reserve print jobs 98
printing from a Macintosh computer 99
printing from Windows 99
resolution, fax
changing 130
Restore held jobs? 277
restoring factory default
settings 256
S
safety information 16, 17
saving paper 108
Scan Center features 142
scan screen
options 143
scan to computer
advanced options, setting 144
options 143, 144
original size 143
paper orientation, setting 144
Scan to Network 30
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a computer 294
partial document or photo scans 293
scan was not successful 292
scanner unit does not close 290
scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 292
ScanBack Utility
using 142
scanner
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) 22
functions 21
scanner glass 22
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 277
scanner glass
cleaning 241
scanner glass (flatbed)
copying using 103
scanning
from a flash drive 142
quick copy 102
to a computer 141
to an FTP address 136
to an FTP, using address book 137
scanning to a computer 141
scanning to a flash drive 142
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the computer 137
using shortcut numbers 136
using the address book 137
using the touch screen 136
Security Audit Log menu 177
security lock 34
sending a fax 128
sending a fax using shortcuts 129
sending a fax using the touch
screen 128
sending fax
using shortcuts 129
using the address book 129
sending fax at a scheduled
time 130
sending fax using the address
book 129
Serial [x] menu 171
serial printing
setting up 66
Set Date/Time menu 178
setting
TCP/IP address 164
setting the fax number or station
number 126
setting the outgoing fax name or
station name 126
setting the paper size 74
setting the paper type 74
setting the Universal paper size 74
setting up e-mail alerts using the
Embedded Web Server 255
setting up fax and e-mail
functions 294
setting up serial printing 66
setting up the printer
on a wired network
(Macintosh) 62
on a wired network (Windows) 62
Setup menu 221
shadow images appear on
prints 304
shipping the printer 253
shortcuts, creating
e-mail 115
fax destination 127, 128
FTP address 138
FTP destination 137
showing icons on the home
screen 29
Sleep Mode
adjusting 70
Slide finisher to the left 277
SMTP Setup menu 173
solid color or black pages appear on
prints 310
Some held jobs were not
restored 277
standard exit bin
lighting, setting 72
Standard Network menu 161
standard tray
loading 75
Standard USB menu 167
staple cartridges
ordering 247
staple jam, clearing
455 staple jam 266
status of supplies
checking 245
storing
paper 88
supplies 245
storing print jobs 98
streaked horizontal lines appear on
prints 311
streaks appear on a page 311
subject and message information
adding to e-mail 117
Substitute Size menu 152
supplies
checking status 245
checking, from printer control
panel 245
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 245
conserving 68
storing 245
using recycled paper 68
Supplies menu 146
supplies, ordering
ADF kit 247
cleaning kit 247
print cartridges 246
staple cartridges 247
waste toner bottle 247
Supply needed to complete job 277
supported flash drives 96
supported paper sizes 88
supported paper types and
weights 90
system board
accessing 35
system board cover
attaching 35
reattaching 35
T
TCP/IP menu 164
telecommunication
notices 325, 326, 327, 328
tips
card stock 98
labels, paper 97
on using envelopes 97
on using letterhead 96
on using transparencies 97
tips on using envelopes 97
tips on using letterhead 96
toner cartridges
recycling 73
toner darkness
adjusting 93
touch screen
buttons 25
transparencies
copying on 103
loading 97
loading in multipurpose feeder 80
tips on using 97
using 97
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 278
tray linking
assigning a custom paper type name 84
tray unlinking
assigning a custom paper type name 84
trays
linking 82
unlinking 83
troubleshooting
an application error has occurred 298
cannot open Embedded Web Server 318
checking an unresponsive printer 269
checking an unresponsive scanner 292
contacting customer support 318
FAQ about color printing 315
fax and e-mail functions are not set up 294
Scan to Network 298
solving basic printer problems 269
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 289
partial document or photo copies 291
poor copy quality 290
poor scanned image quality 293
scanner unit does not close 290
troubleshooting, display
display is blank 286
display shows only diamonds 286
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 294
can receive but not send faxes 297
can send but not receive faxes 296
cannot send or receive a fax 295
received fax has poor print quality 297
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is cleared 302
troubleshooting, print
error reading flash drive 286
held jobs do not print 287
incorrect characters print 288
incorrect margins 305
jammed pages are not reprinted 302
job prints from wrong tray 288
job prints on wrong paper 288
jobs do not print 286
Large jobs do not collate 289
multiple-language PDF files do not print 286
paper curl 306
paper frequently jams 302
print job takes longer than expected 288
tray linking does not work 288
unexpected page breaks occur 289
troubleshooting, print quality
black streaks on a page 311
blank pages 309
characters have jagged edges 303
clipped images 303
fine horizontal lines 303
gray background on prints 304
light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints 305
poor transparency quality 314
print irregularities 306
print is too dark 307
print is too light 308
repeating print defects 309
shadow images appear on prints 304
skewed print 310
solid color or black pages appear on prints 310
streaked horizontal lines appear on prints 311
streaked vertical lines 312
toner fog or background shading 312
toner rubs off 313
toner specks 314
uneven print density 314
white streaks on a page 311
troubleshooting, printer options
2,000-sheet drawer problems 300
cannot detect flash memory card 300
cannot detect printer hard disk 300
internal print server 301
Internal Solutions Port 300
memory card 301
option does not work 299
paper tray problems 299
USB/parallel interface card 301
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a computer 294
partial document or photo scans 293
scan was not successful 292
scanner unit does not close 290
scanning takes too long or freezes the computer 292
U
understanding the home screen
buttons and icons 24
uneven print density 314
Universal Paper Size 158
setting 74
Universal Setup menu 158
unlinking trays 83
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 272
updating options in printer
driver 57
USB port 54
USB/parallel interface card troubleshooting 301
using Eco-Mode 69
using Hibernate Mode 71
using Quiet Mode 69
using recycled paper 68
using shortcuts
sending fax 129
using the address book 116
sending fax 129
using the Embedded Web
Server 254
using the ScanBack Utility 142
using the touch-screen buttons 25
Utilities menu 229
V
verify print jobs 98
printing from a Macintosh
computer 99
printing from Windows 99
viewing
reports 255
viewing a fax log 131
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 254
volatile memory
erasing 237
W
waste toner bottle
ordering 247
replacing 251
wired network setup
using Macintosh 62
using Windows 62
Wireless menu 166
wireless network
configuration information 57
installation, using Macintosh 60
installation, using Windows 58
wireless network setup
in Windows 58
wireless printer setup
in Macintosh 60
WS-Scan 31
X
XPS menu 230